Specifications 4• -
r
1 l
' 'p 1
, .
, ., , ,
RECEIVED
Specifications . . JAN 2 8 2009
CITY OF TIGARD
and other documents BUILDING DIVISION
GAP Store #2805
Washington Square
DO 'S %� S. 0 ' EN ---4
0 ,■„47 0
. ... l = C'
Site Q Prepared by
9677 SW Washington Square Road V p GreenbergFarrow
Tigard, Oregon 97223 -4452 i OF U /2 o 1430 West Peachtree Street
I Suite 200 N.W.
• Atlanta, GA 30309
t: 404 601 4000 1
f: 404 601 3970 j
Issue /Revision Date Description GF Project Number II
01/16/09 Bid and Permit Set 20080538.5
P -000(8
City of Tigard ,,
• , A rov - d Plans �
. ., B g•� #: _ Date Z
�� q7 241i � 3a5D R ,
_,... 0,, 1y 13 �
k OFFICE C OPY _.,
Page left intentionally blank
0_,
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION INDEX - TABLE OF CONTENTS
CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
Section REVINDEX 01/16/09 Table of Contents
Section REV00700 01/16/09 General Conditions
Section REV00800 01/16/09 Supplementary Conditions
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section REV01100 01/16/09 Summary of Work
Section REV01150 01/16/09 Environmental Procedures
Section REV01300 01/16/09 Submittals
Section REV01400 01/16/09 Quality Control
Section REV01500 01/16/09 Construction Facilities
Section REV01600 01/16/09 Material and Equipment
Section REV01630 01/16/09 Substitutions
Section REV01700 01/16/09 Contract Closeout
Section REV01732 01/16/09 Selective Demolition
DIVISION 2 — SITEWORK — Not Used
DIVISION 3 — CONCRETE
Section REV03300 01/16/09 Cast -In -Place Concrete
Section REV03301 01/16/09 Concrete Mix Design Submittal Form
Section REV03542 01/16/09 Cement -Based Underlayment
DIVISION 4 — MASONRY — Not Used
DIVISION 5 — METALS
Section REV05400 01/16/09 Cold- Formed Metal Framing
Section REV05500 01/16/09 Metal Fabrications
Section REV05730 01/16/09 Ornamental Formed Metal
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTIC
Section REV06200 01/16/09 Finish Carpentry
Section REV06402 01/16/09 Interior Architectural Woodwork
TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX -1
I
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section REV07412 01/16/09 Metal Wall Panels
Section REV07841 01/16/09 Through- Penetration Firestop Systems
Section REV07842 01/16/09 Fire - Resistive Joint Systems
Section REV07920 01/16/09 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
Section REV08110 01/16/09 Steel Doors and Frames
Section REV08211 01/16/09 Flush Wood Doors
Section REV08212 01/16/09 Stile and Rail Wood Doors
Section REV08311 01/16/09 Access Doors And Frames
Section REV08450 01/16/09 All -Glass Entrances
Section REV0871 1 01/16/09 Door Hardware
Section REV08800 01/16/09 Glazing
Section REV08830 01/16/09 Mirrors
DIVISION 9 — FINISHES
Section REV09260 01/16/09 Gypsum Board Assemblies
Section REV09310 01/16/09 Ceramic Tile
Section REV09401 01/16/09 Cementitious Terrazzo Tile
Section REV09402 01/16/09 Resinous Terrazzo Tile
Section REV0951 I 01/16/09 Acoustical Panel Ceilings
Section REV09612 01/16/09 Concrete Floor Sealer
Section REV09640 01/16/09 Wood Flooring
Section REV09653 01/16/09 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories
Section REV09680 01/16/09 Carpet
Section REV09900 01/16/09 Painting
Section REV09960 01/16/09 High Performance Coatings
Section REV09961 01/16/09 High -Gloss Coating
DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES
Section REVI0505 01/16/09 Metal Lockers
Section REV10520 01/16/09 Fire - Protection Specialties
Section REV10670 01/16/09 Mobile and Fixed Storage Shelving
Section REV 10801 01/16/09 Toilet and Office Accessories
DIVISION 11— EQUIPMENT
Section REV 11900 01/16/09 Retail Display Specialties
DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS
Section REV12356 01/16/09 Manufactured Casework
INDEX -2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
■
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION — Not Used
DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING SYSTEMS — Not Used
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL — See Mechancial Engineering drawings.
DIVISION 16 — ELECTRICAL — See Electrical Engineering drawings.
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS INDEX -3
•
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON . SQUARETTIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
f.
INDEX-4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
•
-
. - ,
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 00700 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. Conditions: American Institute of Architects (MA) Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction," 1987 Edition, Articles 1 through 14 inclusive is made a part of this Contract.
1. Referenced Conditions maintain force and effect as though set forth in full and shall apply to all positions
of Work.
B. Contractor is hereby specifically directed, as a condition of the Contract, to obtain necessary numbers of copies of
AIA Document A201, and to become fully acquainted with Articles contained therein.
C. The term "Contractor" under this Contract shall refer to subcontractors as well as General Contractor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS 00700 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
00700 -2 GENERAL CONDITIONS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 00800 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
A. Where provisions of General Conditions relate to Project administration and work related requirements of the
Contract, those paragraphs are expanded in Division 1 — General Requirements.
B. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 — General Requirements contain information
necessary for completion of every part of Project.
C. Terms approved, selected, directed, required, accepted, acceptable and satisfactory shall require written action by
Architect.
D. Insurance; Contractor, The Gap, Inc. and Landlord shall review ARTICLE 11 — INSURANCE with their
insurance agents and legal counsel and provide coverages as agreed upon, but not for less than that required by law.
I. Subcontractors: Submit insurance certificate, minimum $1,000,000.00 bodily injury and property damage
including State required workers' compensation, naming General Contractor as additional insured.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank • I,
•
•
- •
00800-2 SUPPLEI4ENTARY 'CONDITIONS
t
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work of Contract comprises construction of retail sales facility as indicated in Contract Documents for The Gap
Stores Incorporated.
1. Project name: Gap Store #2805 "Washington Square"
2. Project location: Gap /Gap Body, Suite F06 9677 SW Washington Square Road, Tigard, OR 97223 -4452
B. Contract Documents are intended to encompass everything necessary to perform Work properly, however, every
item necessarily required may not be specifically mentioned or shown.
1. Materials, systems, and equipment shall be complete and operable unless expressly stated otherwise.
2. Refer to Lease Exhibit B for work performed by Landlord.
C. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
D. Titles and Headings in Contract Documents are for convenience and are not to be taken as a segregation of units of
materials and labor.
I. No responsibility, direct or implied, is assumed by Architect or Owner for omissions or duplications by
contractor or subcontractors due to arrangements of matter in contact Documents.
E. Contractor Use of Premises: Conduct operations to ensure least inconvenience to general public and other
businesses.
1. Limit use of premises for construction and storage to areas designated in writing by landlord: allow for work by
other contractors and public access.
2. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under Contract, including those stored on
site.
3. Coordinate access to building with Landlord and provide for building security as required.
F. Coordination: Coordinate Work to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements.
I . Make provisions for accommodating items installed by Owner or under separate contracts.
2. Verify characteristics of interrelated operating equipment are compatible: coordinate work having
interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing equipment in service.
3. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work: conceal pipes, ducts, and
wiring in finished areas: coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finishes.
G. Establish grades, lines, and levels by use of recognized practices.
H. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor shall be responsible for contacting governing authorities directly for necessary
information and decisions bearing upon performance of Work.
I. Reference Standards:
1. For Products specified by association or trade standards, comply with requirements of referenced standard,
except when more rigid requirements are specified or required by applicable codes.
2. Applicable date of each standard is that in effect as of Proposal date, except when a specific date if specified.
J. Cutting and Patching: Cut, fit, and patch as required to complete Work to match adjacent undisturbed materials and
finishes and to:
1. Make parts fit together properly.
SUMMARY OF WORK 01100 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill -timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as required for testing.
6. Provide routine penetrations of non - structural surfaces for installation of piping and electrical conduit.
7. Should existing finish to be matched be of now out -of- production or otherwise unavailable materials, obtain
Architect's specific approval of substitutions.
8. Provide primers, dealers, underlayments, supports, backing blocking furring, suspension systems, and
accessories as required for any purpose in patching existing work.
9. Patch concrete slab surfaces using epoxy /sand mortar; Adhesive Engineering Company "Concressive 1064,"
Sta -Crete 117 epoxy resin/hardener.
a. Mix fine sand /epoxy using sand/binder ratios recommended by resin manufacturer; finish patches to match
adjacent surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01100
01100 -2 SUMMARY OF WORK
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01150 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General Environmental Concerns: Project requires maximum environmentally conscious work feasible within
limits specified, available materials, equipment, and products.
1. Contract Documents have been prepared to maximize environmental consciousness, recycling, and reuse of
recyclable and reusable materials.
2. Inform Architect where special environmental requirements could detrimentally impact critical path of
construction schedule.
a. Provide separate itemization of costs related to special environmental procedures and to materials
and equipment intended to be environmentally safe.
3. Participate in promoting efforts of Owner to create an energy - efficient and environmentally sensitive
facility.
4. Use recycled, toxic -free, and environmentally sensitive materials, equipment, products, and procedures to
maximum extent possible.
5. Intention of this section is to ensure those involved with Project act positively to protecting the
environment, both on -site and off -site, during demolition and during construction operations.
6. Prevent environmental pollution and damage, and effect optimum control of solid wastes.
B. Special Environmental Definitions:
1. Environmental Pollution and Damage: Presence of chemical, physical, or biological elements or agents
which could:
a. Adversely affect human health or welfare.
b. Unfavorably alter ecological balances important to human life, affect other species of importance to
humanity.
c. Degrade the utility of the environment for aesthetic, cultural or historical purposes.
2. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well prediction run -off
water.
3. Inert Fill: Permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete exclusively.
a. Inert Solids/ Inert Waste: Non - liquid solid waste including, but not limited to, soil and concrete that
does not contain hazardous waste or soluble pollutants at concentrations in excess of water - quality
objectives established by local, state, or national regulatory agencies, and which does not contain
significant quantities of decomposable solid waste.
4. Class III Landfill: Landfill that accepts non - hazardous waste such as household, commercial, and industrial
waste, including construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.
5. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes such as building materials, packaging, rubbish, debris,
and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.
a. Rubbish: combustible and noncombustible wastes such as paper, boxes, glass, crockery, tin cans,
metal, and lumber scrap.
b. Debris: Combustible and noncombustible wastes such as leaves and tree trimmings that result from
construction or maintenance and repair work.
6. Chemical Waste: Petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids, alkalis, herbicides, pesticides,
organic chemical, and inorganic chemical wastes.
7. Sanitary Wastes:
a. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting form preparation, cooking, distribution, or
b. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage
C. Special Environmental Submittals: Comply with general requirements specified in Section 01300 for submittals
and with following special requirements.
1. Requests for Materials Substitutions: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01630 — Substitutions
for submitting requests.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01150 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
a. Indicate how proposed substitutions are more environmentally sensitive or as environmentally
sensitive as specified products.
2. Solid Waste Management and Environmental Protection Plan:
a. Reconstruction Meeting: After award of Contract and prior to commencement of Work, schedule
and conduct meeting with Construction Project Manager to discuss proposed Solid Waste
management and Environmental Protection Plan.
1) Intent is to develop mutual understanding relative to details of environmental protection,
recycling and rebate programs.
3. Submit the following with each application for progress payment: Include manifests, weight tickets,
receipts, and invoices specifically identifying Project and waste material from recycling centers, Class III
landfills, and inert fills.
D. Special Recycling Requirements:
1. Implement recycling program that includes separate collection of waste materials of following types as
applicable and other as appropriate.
a. Asphalt
b. Concrete
c. Porcelain plumbing fixtures
d. Metal (ferrous and non - ferrous)
e. Wood
f. Debris
g. Glass
h. Red clay brick
i. Paper (bond, newsprint, cardboard, and paper packaging)
2. Handling: Recycle materials shall be free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination and other
substances deleterious to recycling process.
a. Arrange for collection by or delivery to appropriate recycling center or transfer station that accepts
construction and demolition waste for purpose of recycling.
3. Participate in Re -Use Programs: Participate in re -use programs to extent available in Project Area.
E. Environmental Controls: Comply with federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to water, air, solid waste,
chemical waste, sanitary waste, sediment and noise pollution.
1. Protection of Natural Resources: Preserve the natural resources within Project boundaries and outside limits
of permanent work performed under Contract in existing condition or restore to an equivalent or improved
condition upon completion of Work.
a. Work Activities: Confine demolition and construction activities to areas defined by limits indicated
on Drawings.
b. Water Resources: Comply with applicable regulations concerning direct and indirect discharge of
pollutants to underground and natural waters.
1) Oily Substances: Prevent oily and other hazardous substances from entering ground, drainage
areas and local bodies of water in quantities which could produce measurable ecological
impact on area.
2) Construction Equipment: Store and service constriction equipment at areas designated for
collection of oil wastes.
c. Land Resources: Identify land resources to be preserved within work area prior to construction
I) Approvals: Do not remove, cut, deface, 8injure, or destroy land resources, including trees,
shrubs, vines, grasses, top soil, and land forms, without prior Owner approval
d. Dust, Air Pollution, and Odor Control: Prevent creation of dust, air pollution and odors:
1) Use water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, and other appropriate methods to limit dust and
dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practicable level.
2) So not use water when it could create hazardous or other adverse conditions such as flooding
and pollution.
3) Store volatile liquids, including fuels and solvents, in closed containers.
4) Properly maintain equipment to reduce gaseous pollutant emissions.
01150-2 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
• GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR -STORE #2805
, e. Noise Control: Perform demolition and construction operations to minimize noise: perform noise
producing work in less sensitive hours of the day or week as directed, by Landlord of Building
- Owner.
f. Disposal Operations: Promptly and legally transport and dispose of removed and demolished items
and waste materials no identified to be recycled or reused: Do not burn, bury or otherwise dispose
of rubbish and waste materials on Project Site.
PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3- EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01150
•
•
ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01150-3, •
416:
•
•
01/-16%09'- - • _ GAP, INC.
_ • WASHINGTON OR - STORE #2805 20080538
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
01150 -4 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01300 - SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General Contractor shall review and coordinate submittals prior to Architect review, with both prior to fabrication
or installation.
1. Schedule submittals in orderly sequence to prevent delays in construction.
2. Inform Architect in writing at time of submission of any proposed deviation in submittal from requirements
of Contract Documents.
B. Contractor, by reviewing submittals, indicates verification of compliance and Contract Documents, field
measurements, field construction criteria, materials and similar data.
C. Product Data: Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, options, and other data; supplement
manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to Work; include installation instructions.
1. Submit number of copies which Contractor requires plus two copies which will be retained by Architect.
D. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for custom fabricated items and as required by various Specification
sections.
I. Submit three prints of each shop drawing; drawings to include title block, reference to architectural
drawing, and required information: minimum sheet size 8 -1/2" x 11 ".
2. Corrections and notations will be made on reproducible; incorporate revisions and resubmit when directed
by Architect.
3. Architect review is for design concept only, Contractor is responsible for shop drawing accuracy, fittings,
coordination construction techniques, materials, and work required by Contract Documents.
4. Architect review of shop drawings does not signify approval of departures form Contract requirements.
5. Reproduce and distribute after Architect review. Allow one week for Architect review.
E. Samples: Provide minimum two samples of finish materials; ship samples to General Contractor prepaid; sample
sized between 6" and 12 "; submit full range of standard colors, textures and patterns upon request.
1. Submit three prints of each shop drawing; drawings to include title block, reference to architectural
drawing, and required information: minimum sheet size 8 -1/2" x I I"
2. Include Project, Specification and location on each sample, giving full information.
F. Certificates: Submit certificates, in duplicate, in accordance with requirements of Specification section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01300
SUBMITTALS 01300 -1
01/16/09 • GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
•
Page left intentionally blank
01300 -2 SUBMITTALS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. General Quality Control: Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, Products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: When specified in respective Specification sections, require manufacturer or
supplier to have qualified personnel provide on -site observations and recommendations.
1. Representative shall:
a. Observe field conditions, including conditions of surfaces.
b. Observe quality of workmanship and methods of installation.
c. Provide recommendations for installations and workmanship.
d. Where required, start, test, and adjust equipment as applicable.
e. Submit written report to Owner's Representative of observations.
C. Testing Laboratory Services: Provide testing laboratory services required by local authorities for conformance to
applicable codes.
1. Services shall be performed in accordance with requirements of governing authorities.
2. Where tests are required, testing laboratory shall submit copy of test results directly to enforcing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01400
QUALITY CONTROL 01400 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
01400 -2 QUALITY CONTROL
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Temporary Power: Provide power service and lighting required for operations, with branch wiring and distribution
boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction -type power cords.
1. Connect to existing service; provide branch wiring and distribution boxes located to allow service and
lighting by means of construction -type power cords.
2. Maintain energy managements controls to conserve power.
B. Noise, Dust, and Pollution Control: Provide materials and equipment necessary to comply with Landlord and local
requirements for noise, dust and pollution control.
C. Barriers and Enclosures:
1. Provide environmentally safe barriers as may be required to protect adjacent properties from damage from
operations, and as required by governing authorities.
2. Provide, as specified, environmentally safe temporary enclosures where construction penetrates exterior
components.
3. Materials: Provide, as specified, environmentally safe materials which are nontoxic, recyclable, or reusable.
D. Cleaning: Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; recycle or dispose of off -site at intervals approved
by Landlord and complying with special environmental procedures specified in Section 01150,
E. Signs: Subject to approval of Owner and Landlord.
F. Removal and Cleaning: Remove construction facilities, clean and repair damage, in excess of Contract
requirements, caused by operations or use of temporary facilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01500
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01500 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC:
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
01500 -2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/I'IGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01600 - MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL (Not Used)
PART 2- PRODUCTS
A. Products: Components supplied in quantity shall be interchangeable; provide materials and systems by one
manufacturer to extent possible; provide new materials unless otherwise directed in Contract Documents.
B. Provide or install no asbestos - containing materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. Installation: Install items plumb, level, and secure, and in correct relation to adjacent products.
1. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,
vibration, and racking.
B. Transportation: Transport products by methods to avoid damage, deliver undamaged in manufacturer's unopened
containers or packaging. Manufacturers are encouraged to use recyclable or reusable packaging materials.
C. Handling: Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling and damage.
1. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and
products are undamaged.
D. Storage: Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with decals and labels intact and legible.
1. Periodically inspect to assure precuts are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
E. Protection: After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and construction
operations, remove when no longer needed. See Sections 09640 Wood Flooring, for floor protection requirements.
END OF SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -1
01M 6/09 GAP, INC.
- • WASiiINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OW-STORE . #2805 20080538
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
•
01600-2 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01630 - SUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Products: Provide materials, systems, and equipment specified; for products specified by reference standard,
provide product meeting standard; submit requests for substitutions for products not specified.
B. Requests for Substitutions: Submit requests for substitutions to Architect with manufacturers "cut sheet" in
writing, Architect will signify acceptance wither by submitting AIA form G709 Proposal Request, or in writing on
GAP letterhead. Additional environmental requirements for substitution requests are given in Section C.1 .a.
C. Contractor: Investigate proposed substitutions prior to submittal to Architect; include cost and schedule changes
caused by substitutions; submit separate request for each product.
1. Requests indicate Contractor has investigated product and that it meets or exceed specified product; will
provide same warranty; and waives claims for additional costs which subsequently become apparent.
2. Substitute products shall not be ordered without written acceptance of Architect.
3. Environmental Concerns: Proposed substitutions shall be at least as environmentally sound as specified
products; Manufacturers cut sheets, product composition information, fire rating, smoke density, and other
information may be required by Architect for environmental considerations.
D. Architect and Owner will be final judges of acceptability and reserve right to reject proposals due to insufficient
information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01630
SUBSTITUTIONS 01630- I
01/16/09 GAP, INC. •
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally' blank
•
•
•
•
•
01630-2 • SUBSTITUTIONS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01700 - CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Comp_ letion: At completion submit certification Work has been inspected and has been completed in accordance
with Contract Documents and deficiencies noted by Architect and Owner have been corrected.
B. Final Cleaning: Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign
substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted , and soft surfaces. Use only non - toxic
cleaning materials: vinegar and water shall be used for cleaning glass, no other cleaning materials shall be
permitted for glass.
1. Clean bathrooms, stockroom including mopping floors, storefront glass inside and out, and mirrors; clean
cashwrap including drawers, glass, resilient floor, and c_ lean shelves of dust and marks.
2. Dust light fixtures and thoroughly vacuum carpet.
3. Clean wood floors as specified in wood flooring section.
4. Touch up marred surfaces, dents, and scratches completely.
5. Repair or replace damaged finishes as required by Gap representative.
6. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment.
7. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish from Project and site.
8. Assemble and clean floor display fixtures.
C. Project Record Document: Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal work until required information
•
has been recorded.
1. Indicate actual work on Drawings; indicate actual products used in Project manual, including manufacturer,
model number, and options.
D. Data: Provide material, finish, maintenance data submitted by manufacturers bound in three -ring binders,
organized in format similar to specifications.
I . Provide written operating instructions and maintenance procedure for equipment installed under equipment,
electrical, plumbing, air conditioning, heating, and ventilating subcontracts.
E. Warranties: Provide warranties as required by Contract Documents and where provided by manufacturer for
products specified.
1. Provide duplicate copies on Contractor letterhead, countersigned by manufacturer, and where specified,
countersigned by subcontractor and installer.
2. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves right to reject unsolicited and coincidental product warranties
which detract from, or confuse interpretations of Contract Documents.
F. Demonstrations: Prior to final inspection, demonstrate operation of each system to Owner.
PART 2 _ PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 01700
•
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -1
. J
01/16/09- GAP, INC.
, WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
• 01700 -2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of an existing mall tenant lease space, in preparation
for renovation.
2. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 15 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating mechanical items.
2. Division 16 Sections for demolishing, cutting, patching, or relocating electrical items.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off -site, unless indicated
to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner ready for
reuse.
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall
them where indicated.
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise
indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.
E. Business Hours: Hours during which shopping center is open to the public, unless otherwise defined in
writing by Owner or building manager.
F. Overnight, After Hours: Hours during which shopping center is closed to the public, unless otherwise
defined in writing by Owner or building manager.
1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to
remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be
removed from Project site.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their
capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
B. Proposed Dust - Control and Noise - Control Measures: Submit statement or drawing that indicates the
measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify
options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate.
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for
each activity. Ensure Owner's, building manager's, and other tenants' on -site operations are
uninterrupted.
2. Interruption of utility services.
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.
4. Use of elevator and stairs.
5. Locations of temporary partitions and means of egress, including for other tenants affected by
selective demolition operations.
6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing space and of Owner's
partial occupancy of completed Work.
D. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit, for information only, a list of items that have
been removed and salvaged.
1. Note items damaged during demolition.
2. Note shortfalls of materials scheduled for reuse.
3. Note numbered items, such as ceiling panels.
E. Predemolition Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site
improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by selective
demolition operations. Submit before Work begins.
F. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to
accept hazardous wastes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in
material and extent to that indicated for this Project.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: Comply with Division 1 Section "Quality Controls."
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
E. Predemolition Conference:
01732 -2 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
1. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled
meeting dates and times.
b. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
c. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting
minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the
meeting.
d. Notification: Inform participants 3 days prior to meetings not regularly scheduled.
2. Review methods and procedures related to selective demolition including, but not limited to, the
following:
a. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
b. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
c. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
d. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
selective demolition operations.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, perform Work after business hours.
B. Owner's tenants occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area.
1. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's tenants operations will not be disrupted, except as
agreed in advance.
2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's tenant
operations.
C. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written
permission from building manager and authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as
practical.
E. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:
1. Merchandise within 5 feet of Work area.
2. Shelves.
3. Freestanding retail display fixtures.
F. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;
immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under
a separate contract.
G. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on -site will not be permitted.
H. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1. Maintain fire- protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during
selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
1. If possible, retain original Installer or fabricator to patch the exposed Work listed below that is
damaged during selective demolition. If it is impossible to engage original Installer or fabricator,
engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm.
a. Ornamental metal.
b. Preformed metal panels.
c. Roofing.
d. Firestopping.
e. Storefront system.
f. Stucco and ornamental plaster.
g. Terrazzo.
h. HVAC enclosures, cabinets, or covers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that
visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
B. Comply with submittal, material and installation requirements specified in individual Specification
Sections.
01732 -4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
GAP, 1NC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped, where indicated or required for the Work.
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective
demolition required.
C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and
salvaged. Number items according to Drawings.
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or
design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a
written report to Architect.
E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.
F. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES
A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during
selective demolition operations.
B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by
Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing
utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover.
C. Utility Requirements: Refer to Division 15 and 16 Sections for shutting off, disconnecting, removing,
and sealing or capping utilities. Do not start selective demolition work until utility disconnecting and
sealing have been completed and verified in writing.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Dangerous Materials: Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases,
explosives, acids, flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition
operations.
B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris- removal operations to
ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and
used facilities.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner, building manager, and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations or
building manager.
2. Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways,
where required by building manager or authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
C. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to
people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Comply with requirements of building
manager and authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed
during selective demolition operations.
2. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, merchandise, and equipment that have not been
removed.
D. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust
and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise.
3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Dust Control: Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt.
Comply with governing environmental - protection regulations.
1. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or objectionable
conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
2. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition
enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas.
B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and
areas.
1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to existing condition before selective demolition
operations began.
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction
and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
regulations and as follows:
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective
demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next
lower level.
01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting
methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools
or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize
disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing
finished surfaces.
4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed
spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before
starting flame - cutting operations. Maintain portable fire- suppression devices during flame -
cutting operations. Maintain fire watch where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
6. Remove decayed, vermin- infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly
dispose of off -site.
7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall
and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose
excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
10. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing before
selective demolition operations began.
B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators,
stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective
demolition operations.
C. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean salvaged items.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: Comply with the following:
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to
match new equipment.
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials
and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make
item functional for use indicated.
E. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected
storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after
selective demolition operations are complete.
F. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures
with construction to remain, using power -driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete
indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.
G. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in
RFCI -WP and its Addendum.
1. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods
recommended by RFCI.
H. Air- Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
3.6 PATCHING AND REPAIRS
A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations.
B. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new
materials.
1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing gypsum board walls that are to remain with an
approved joint compound applied according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
C. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction
in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
D. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another,
patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish
color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over patch
and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide additional coats
until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
3. Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of
installation.
E. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of
uniform appearance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
on -site.
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
END OF SECTION 01732
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 01732 -9
' • "
- •
01/16/09 • GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank •
•
, .
. „
•_
•
.„.
01732-10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 03300 - CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide Cast -In -Place Concrete, including formwork, reinforcement and special finishes where shown on the
drawings, as specified in this section, and as needed for a complete installation.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS:
A. The Contractor shall submit Concrete Mix Designs and Concrete Test Reports meeting ACI 318- Chapter 5
standards, per Section 01300 - Submittals and as specified elsewhere herein for construction quality control and
contract closeout.
1. In order and to expedite the timely review of these submittals, the Concrete Mix Designs and Concrete Test
Reports Submittals may be sent to the project Structural Engineer directly by fax, if the Structural Engineer is
notified by the Contractor's superintendent at least 48 hours in advance, so as to allow the Structural Engineer
adequate time to schedule the submittal review. The mix design shall be submitted on the Mix Design Submittal
Form included at the end of this specification.
2. If this submittal is sent to the project Structural Engineer by fax, then the hard copies of this submittal shall
additionally be sent to the Architect/ Engineer in accordance with Section 01300- Submittals.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. The Contractor shall NOT commence placement of concrete until the Concrete Mix Designs and Concrete Test
Reports Submittals have been reviewed and approved by the Architect/ Engineer, and until the copies of the
approved Concrete Mix Designs are received at the jobsite and the batch plant.
B. The Contractor shall provide access for and cooperate with the Testing/ Inspection Agency as described in Section
01400- Construction Quality Control Services.
C. Admixtures: When field service is requested for admixture use, a qualified concrete technician employed by the
concrete manufacturer shall assist in proportioning concrete materials, and shall advise on proper use of admixture
and adjustment of concrete mix proportions to meet jobsite and climatic conditions. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates
or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete in Buildings "; ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting "; ACI 306 "Cold
Weather Concreting ".
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300- I
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORMWORK:
A. The Contractor shall design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to safely support vertical and lateral loads
which might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. The Contractor shall include
values for live load; dead load; weight of moving equipment operating on the formwork; concrete mix; height of
concrete drop; vibrator frequency, ambient temperature, foundation pressures, stresses, lateral stability and other
factors impacting the safety of the formwork structure during construction.
B. The Contractor shall construct formwork to the exact sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown on the drawings and
as required to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, and level and plumb work in the finished structure.
2.2 MOISTURE/ VAPOR BARRIER:
A. Provide a Moisture/ Vapor Barrier — above subgrade, free of material having rough edges (or as approved by the
Geotechnical Engineer) — under the subsequently placed 2" clean sand and concrete slab.
1. Provide 10 mil minimum membrane when concrete is to be placed by pump or conveyor.
a. The vapor barrier shall conform to ASTM E1745, Class A or B. The membrane shall have a water -vapor
permeance rate no greater than 0.012 perms when tested in accordance with ASTM E154, Section 7. Vapor
barrier shall be no less than 10 mil thick in accordance with ACI 302.1 R -96.
b. Acceptable products and manufacturers
1) Stego Industries, LLC: " Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A"
2) Reef Industries: "Griffolyn 10 mil Green"
3) Raven Industries: "Vapor Block 10 mil"
4) W.R. Meadows, Inc.: "Perminator 10 mil"
2.3 REINFORCEMENT:
A. Reinforcement shall comply with the following minimum requirements:
1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615 or ASTM A706, Grade 40, deformed bars for #3 and #4, Grade 60, deformed
bars #5 and larger reinforcing.
2. Reinforcing bending: ACI 3I8.
B. Fabricate all reinforcement to the required shapes and dimensions, within the fabrication tolerances specified in the
CRSI "Manual of Standard Practices ".
C. Do NOT use reinforcement having any of the following defects:
1. Bar lengths, depths, or bends which exceed specified fabrication tolerances.
2. Bends or kinks not indicated on the drawings or required for this work.
3. Reinforcing bars with reduced cross - sectional area due to rust or other cause.
D. Reinforcement shall NOT be placed within the top 2" or bottom 2" of the concrete slab.
2.4 CONCRETE:
A. Comply with the following minimum requirements:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or II, low alkali or ASTM C1157, Type GU or LH.
2. Aggregate, General: ASTM C33, uniformly graded and clean. Do not use aggregate known to cause excessive
shrinkage.
3. Aggregate, Coarse: Washed gravel with 11/2" maximum size ( #467) for 6" slabs and 1" ( #57) for 4" slabs.
4. Aggregate, Fine: Natural washed sand of hard and durable particles varying from fine to particles passing a 3/8"
screen, of which at least 12% shall pass a 50- mesh screen.
03300 -2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
5. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be 8% - 18% for large top size
aggregates (1' in.) or 8% - 22% for smaller top size aggregates (1 in. or 3 /4 in.) retained on each sieve below the
top size and above the No. 100.
6. Water: Clean and potable.
7. Flyash not permitted except where concrete is in contact with soils having severe or very severe sulfate content
and Type V cement is not readily available or to mitigate concrete against potential aggregate reactivity.
a. Class For C fly ash (or Class N pozzolan) per ASTM C 618, except loss on ignition to be 3% maximum.
1) Use of fly ash only permitted for the following conditions:
a) In foundation concrete.
b) If Type V cement is unavailable or is insufficient to mitigate by itself, then fly ash can be used to
mitigate sulfate exposure or as a means of mitigation of potential aggregate reactivity. To mitigate
potential aggregate reactivity, the fly ash is to have the following properties
2) 5% available alkali
3) Maximum 8% CaO (up to 10% CaO if a minimum replacement of 30% by weight of Type F fly ash is
used)
b. Ground- Granulated - Blast - Furnace Slag (GGBF) per ASTM C 989
1) Use of slag only permitted for the following conditions:
a) In foundation concrete.
b) If Type V cement is unavailable or is insufficient to mitigate by itself, then slag can be used to
mitigate sulfate exposure or as a means of mitigation of potential aggregate reactivity.
2) Slag to have the following properties: Grade 100 or 120
c. Silica Fume per ASTM C 1 240
1) Only permitted to mitigate sulfate exposure or as a means of mitigation of potential aggregate
reactivity.
2) Silica fume shall be added only in slurry form and well mixed.
8. Concrete mixture with temperature at or above 95 degrees F — when delivered to site — shall be rejected.
9. Water to cement ratio shall be 0.45 maximum. (Four -inch thick slabs — allowed to dry from only one side —
typically require 90 -120 days to achieve a moisture vapor emission rate of 3 lbs. per 1,000SF per 24 hours.)
"Quick -dry" concrete with a maximum W /cm of 0.40 will typically require 60 — 70 days to achieve this moisture
emission rate.
10. Provide concrete with the compressive strengths and limiting slumps as shown on the drawings.
2.5 ADMIXTURE:
A. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted.
B. The Contractor shall provide Admixture(s) as specified from the following manufacturer:
THE EUCLID CHEMICAL COMPANY
19218 Redwood Road
Cleveland, OH 44110
Tel. 800/ 321 -7628.
C. Admixture: Provide EUCON 37 or PLASTOL 5000 "High -range Water Reducer — Superplasticizer" admixture.
D. Alternative Admixture: Provide EUCON 537 in lieu of EUCON 37 if placing concrete when ambient temperatures
exceed 90 degrees F (32 degrees C).
E. Acceptable Product Substitutions:
1. Sikament 86 by Sika
2. Rheobuild 1000 by Master Builders
3. ADVA Flow, Daracem 100, & Daracem 19 by Grace Construction Products
F. Superplasticizer shall comply with ASTM C494 — Type A, F & G.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.6 CONCRETE CURING COMPOUND:
A. Curing Materials: Except where specified otherwise, all concrete curing shall comply with Chapter 9 of ACI
302.1R. Methods shall include Water Curing, Sheet Materials for Moist Curing, or Liquid membrane - forming
curing compound.
1. Sheet Materials for Moist Curing Concrete Slabs: ASTM C 171.
a. Synthetic Fiber/Plastic Sheet, multiple use sheets:
1) White synthetic fiber matting securely attached to white plastic sheet backing.
2) Ensure used sheets are clean, serviceable, functional and approved for use by the Owner's
Representative. Replace sheets that are not acceptable to the Owner's Representative.
3) Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a) PNA Construction Technologies: "HydraCure"
b) Reef Industries: "Transguard 4000"
b. Synthetic Fiber/Plastic Sheet, single use sheets:
1) White synthetic fiber matting securely attached to white plastic sheet backing.
2) Ensure sheets are new and used only one time.
3) Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a) Reef Industries: Transguard EG
c. Cellulose Fiber/Plastic Sheet, single use sheets:
1) White cellulose fiber matting securely attached to clear plastic sheet backing.
2) Ensure sheets are only used in areas that are protected from direct sunlight.
3) Ensure sheets are new and used only one time.
4) Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a) McDonald Technology Group: UltraCure NCF
d. Cellulose Fiber/Plastic Sheet, single use sheets:
I) White cellulose fiber matting securely attached to white plastic sheet backing.
2) Ensure sheets are new and used only one time.
3) Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:
a) McDonald Technology Group: UltraCuresun
2. Liquid Membrane - forming Cure: Conforming to ASTM C -309 or ASTM C -1315.
a. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound: VOC Compliant, Liquid type membrane - forming curing/sealing
compound, clear styrene acrylate type, complying with ASTM C1315, Type I, Class A, 25% solids content
minimum. Manufacturer's certification is required. Do not apply this material to areas receiving any type of
applied finish or coating.
1) Euclid Chemical Company: Super Diamond Clear VOX
b. Strippable Curing Compound: Use strippable curing compound on surfaces to be covered with finish or
coating material applied directly to concrete. Product shall meet ASTM C -309, Type 1. Manufacturer's
certification is required.
1) Edoco: Burke Aqua Resin Cure
2) Euclid Chemical Company: Kurez DR VOX
3. Slab Vertical Edge Liquid Membrane Curing Compound
a. Conform to ASTM C 1315, Type I.
b. 25% minimum solids content.
c. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:
1) Burke by Edoco: 1315 Cure Seal
2) Euclid Chemical Company: "Super Rez- Seal"
3) Sonneborn (Degussa Building Systems): "Kure -N -Seal 30"
d. Acceptable VOC compliant Products and Manufacturers (use only where local VOC restrictions prohibit
the products listed above):
1) Burke by Edoco: Spartan Cote WB II
2) Euclid Chemical Company: "Aqua -Cure VOX"
3) Sonneborn: "Kure N- Seal"
2.7 JOINT - FILLER FOR EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTRACTION (CONTROL) JOINTS, & CONSTRUCTION
03300 -4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
JOINTS:
A. Refer to Section 07920 — Sealants and Caulking.
2.8 SPECIAL CONCRETE SURFACES:
A. Detectable Warning Surface:
1. Locations: Except as may be specifically approved otherwise by the location jurisdiction, the Contractor shall
provide a detectable warning on handicap ramp surfaces and adjacent landing areas as shown on the drawings.
2. Detectable Warning Surface: The Contractor shall provide a Coarse Broom Finish on the designated handicap
ramp surfaces and adjacent landing areas ONLY if acceptable by and customary within the local jurisdiction.
2.9 OTHER MATERIALS:
A. Grout: Provide non - shrink, non - staining water resistant grout meeting ASTM CI107 for package dry, hydraulic -
cement grout (non - shrinkable). Acceptable manufacturers:
I. "EUCO N -S Grout ", by Euclid Chemical Company.
2. "CG -86 Construction Grout ", by W. R. Meadows Inc./ SealTight.
B. Bonding Agent: The compound shall be a polyvinyl acetate type. Rewettable: "Euco Weld" by The Euclid
Chemical Co. or "Weldcrete" by The Larsen Co. Use only in areas not subject to moisture. In these areas use a non -
rewettable; polymer modified, bonding admixture, "Flex-Con" by The Euclid Chemical Company in an approved
bonding grout.
C. Polymer Patching Mortar: "Thin Top Supreme /Concrete Top Supreme (horizontal repairs), "Verticoat or Verticoat
Supreme" (vertical and overhead repairs) by The Euclid Chemical Co. or "Sikatop 121 or 122" (horizontal repairs),
"Sikatop 123" (vertical and overhead repairs) by Sika Chemical Corp. These patching mortars may be used when
color match of the adjacent concrete is not required. Prior approval by the Engineer is required.
D. Waterstop: Provide bentonite/butyl rubber -based waterstop; Volclay Waterstop and Volclay WB Adhesive or
equivalent approved in writing by the Architect.
E. Construction joint: Provide premanufactured keyed construction joints equal to 24 gauge galvanized steel "Key -Loc
Joint" system, by Form -A -Key Products Division, Louisville KY.
1. Stake premanufactured keyed construction joint into subgrade at 24" on center, with snap -in joint splices.
Provide Key -Loc Joint #0658 removable plastic caps continuously along all joints. Use only in areas not
subjected to vehicular traffic.
F. Expansion joint: Expanded polyethylene, low - density closed -cell foam expansion joint filler with zip strip. (Refer to
Section 07920.)
G. Form Release Agent: Provide colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture or impair natural
bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
H. Interior Control Joint and Sawcut Joint Filler: Refer to Section 07920 — Sealants and Caulking for joint - filler
requirements.
I. Exterior Control Joint Sealers and Fillers: The Contractor shall provide one - component, moisture curing
polyurethane sealant meeting Federal Spec TT- S- 00227E, ASTM C90, equal to "THC -901" sealant, as
manufactured by Tremco, Beachwood OH.
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.10 PRE - CONCRETE CONFERENCE
A. At least 35 days prior to the start of the concrete construction schedule, the contractor shall conduct a meeting to
review the proposed mix designs and to discuss the required methods and procedures necessary to achieve the
required concrete quality. The contractor shall send a pre- concrete conference agenda to all attendees 20 days prior
to the scheduled date of the conference.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS:
A. The Contractor shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be provided, shall
correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work, and shall NOT proceed until
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.2 REINFORCING:
A. Clean reinforcement and remove ,loose dust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce bond with
concrete.
B. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, or required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, lap bars 24
diameters minimum.
3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS:
A. Minimum Concrete Coverage:
1. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2" concrete cover over the top of the embedded conduit. The
conduit shall be located under the welded wire fabric, and the concrete depth shall be increased accordingly to
accommodate the minimum clearances specified.
2. The Contractor must also increase the thickness of the concrete and maintain minimum concrete coverage as
specified if the outside diameter of the conduit exceeds 30% of the concrete thickness.
B. Structural Concrete: The Contractor shall NOT embed piping, other than electrical ducts and conduit, in structural
concrete. Minimum coverage as specified must be maintained.
C. The Contractor shall accurately locate bolts, inserts, and other required items in the concrete, secured so they will not
be displaced. The Contractor shall provide sleeves or core -drill finished concrete to receive guardrails, handrails or
fencing.
3.4 TRANSIT MIX CONCRETE:
A. Transport mix concrete per ASTM C94.
3.5 PLACING CONCRETE:
A. Do not permit concrete to free drop more than 6' -0 ". Deposit concrete in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 ", and
avoid inclined construction joints.
3.6 CONSOLIDATION:
A. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing, by use of internal concrete vibrators supplemented by
hand spading, rodding, or tamping. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement, or use vibrators to transport concrete
inside the forms.
03300 -6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
3.7 JOINTS:
A. Construction and Contraction (Control) Joints: Provide sawcut joints in key or butt construction joints as detailed
and where shown on drawings. Note where dowel construction joints are required.
B. Expansion Joints: Do not permit reinforcement or other embedded metal items that are being bonded with concrete
(except dowels in floors bonded on only side of the joints) to extend continuously through any expansion joint.
3.8 SCHEDULE OF CONCRETE FINISHES:
A. Interior concrete floor slab: Floated, with hard steel troweled finish; curing and sealing compound. Grinding or
acrylic vinyl flash patch, trowel applied, if required. Construction or Contraction (Control) joint filler or sealant as
noted on the drawings.
B. Exterior Slabs (except where specifically noted otherwise): Light Broom Finish.
C. All finishes must be adequate in all respects to receive material to be applied to it, true to line, and free of defects
and blemishes. Troweled finish floors shall achieve an FF35/FL30 tolerance. The finished concrete slabs that
contain defects exceeding this tolerance shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. No dryers, dry cement, nor
cement sand mixture shall be used in conjunction with any finish surfaces to absorb water, stiffen mix or for any
other purpose.
D. Hard Steel - Troweled Finish : The surface shall first be float - finished. It shall then power - troweled at least twice to a
smooth dense finish. The first troweling after power- floating shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free
of defects but which may still show some trowel marks. Additional troweling(s) shall be done so that the finished
surface shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and shall achieve an FF35/FL30 tolerance.
On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defect — of sufficient magnitude that may show through the
floor coverings — shall be removed by grinding.
END OF SECTION
( "Concrete Mix Design SUBMITTAL FORM" to follow)
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -7
•
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE%TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
03300 -8 CAST -IN- PLACE CONCRETE
Concrete Floor Mix Design SUBMITTAL FORM
Project:
City:
General Contractor:
Concrete Contractor:
Compressive Strength @ 28 days:
Flexural Strength 28 days:
Use (describe):
Design Mix Information
Please check one
Based on Standard Deviation Analysis
Trial Mix Test Data
Design Characteristics:
Density pcf
Strength psi (28 day)
Air % specified
If trial mixes are used the Mix Design is proportioned to achieve f'cr = f'c + 1200 psi
(1400 psi for strength higher than 5000 psi at 28 days)
MATERIALS Type/ Specific Absolute
Source Gravity Weight /lb. Vol. cu. ft.
Cement
Fine Aggregate
Coarse Aggregate • izo cu ft target
Steel Fibers
Synthetic Fibers
Water
Air (Entrapped)
Other
TOTAL 27.0 cu. ft.
Water /Cement Ratio (lbs. water /lbs. cement) _
NOTE: Previous experience indicates a water content of 275 lbs./cy. minimum for 2" - 3 " slump
for well graded combined aggregates with a top size of 1':
ADMIXTURES Dosage
Manufacturer oz /cwt
Water Reducer
High Range Water Reducer
Non - Corrosive Accelerator
Other
CONCRETE FLOOR MIX DESIGN FORM
Page 1 of 2
Slump before HRWR inches
Slump after HRWR inches
Standard Deviation Analysis (from experience records) of project.
Test reports are from to
# of Test Cylinders Evaluated:
Standard Deviation:
f'cr-f'c + 1.345 or f'cr = f c +2.33s -500
(Refer to ALT 301 for increased deviation factor when less than 30 tests are available)
LABORATORY TEST DATA
Compressive Strength Age (days) Mix # 1 Mix #2 Mix #3
7 psi psi psi
7 psi psi psi
28 psi psi psi
28 psi psi psi
28 average psi psi psi
REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS:
Please Check
Combined Aggregate Gradation Report
Standard Deviation Analysis Summary or Trial Mixture Test Data
Admixture Compatibility certification letter
Note : 8% - 18% aggregate required to be retained on each sieve except the top size and #100.
Concrete Producer:
Name:
Address:
Phone #:
Main Plant Location:
Miles from Project:
Secondary Plant Location:
Miles from Project:
Date:
CONCRETE FLOOR MIX DESIGN FORM
Page 2 of 2
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 03542 - CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cement - based, polymer - modified, self - leveling underlayment for interior finish flooring.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show substrates, locations, and average depths of cement -based underlayment based on survey of
substrate conditions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Verify compatibility of cement -based underlayment including surface sealers, if any, with indicated finish flooring
products, including adhesives.
B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years of experience in the successful application of abrasion resistant
concrete topping products.
C. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's most recently published product technical bulletins Including, installation
instructions, jobsite checklist, substrate testing, field flow test kit to verify mixed material, surface preparation and
cleaning, and post installation inspection or testing.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until
time of use. Deliver and store materials on site at least 24 hours before work begins.
B. Storage and Protection: Prevent damage or contamination of materials by water, freezing, foreign matter or other
causes. Provide heated and dry storage facilities on site.
C. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead -time requirements to avoid construction
delays.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to
comply with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Maintain surface and ambient temperatures at not less than
50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation and for 7 days after completion. Maximum surface and ambient
temperatures during application is 85 degrees F (30 degrees C). Applications made during temperatures greater than
85 degrees F should follow Hot Weather Application guidelines, as per ACI (American Concrete Institute).
CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Ardex; K -15.
2. Fritz Industries, Inc.; F -10.
3. Mapei Corporation; Ultraplan M20.
B. Underlayment: Cement - based, polymer - modified, self - leveling product that can be applied in uniform thicknesses
from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 2 inches (50.8 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations,
and suitable as a wear topping.
1. Cement Binder: One of the following:
a. ASTM C 150, portland cement or
b. Hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.
2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109 /C
109M.
C. Accessory Materials:
I. Primers: Recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate, thickness, and conditions indicated. Use
primer by same manufacturer as underlayment.
a. Ardex; P -51 for use over absorptive concrete substrates.
b. Ardex; P82 Ultra Prime, for use over non - absorptive substrates including burnished concrete, terrazzo,
quarry tile and epoxy coatings.
c. Ardex MC, for use over newly placed concrete.
d. Fritz Industries, Inc.; Fritz P -100 acrylic primer, for use over absorptive concrete substrates.
e. Mapei Corporation; Ultraprime L acrylic primer, for use over absorptive concrete substrates.
f. Mapei Corporation; Ultraprime WE primer, for use over non - absorptive substrates.
g. Mapei Corporation; Planibond EBA primer, for use over newly placed concrete.
2. Aggregate: Recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate, thickness and conditions indicated.
3. Metal Lath: Recommended in writing by manufacturer for substrate, thickness and conditions indicated.
4. Potable water.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING
A. Site mix with potable water according to Manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Test mixture according to Manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean substrates. Provide clean, dry, neutral -pH substrate for underlayment application.
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
2. Fill substrate voids with Manufacturer- recommended repair material to prevent underlayment from leaking.
3. Concrete Substrates:
a. Mechanically remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form - release agents, dust, dirt,
grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
b. Provide a minimum surface profile of at least CSP 5 in accordance with ICRI (International Concrete
Repair Institute) guidelines. Fill any holes or voids in the substrate with Manufacturer - recommended repair
material.
B. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
03542 -2 CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON'SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate application of components, including primer, to provide, optimum underlayment -to- substrate and
intercoat adhesion. . .
1. Apply primer according to Manufacturer's written instructions for substrate, thickness and conditions indicated.
•
B. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
1. Follow Manufacturer's written instructions for substrate, thickness and conditions indicated.
2. Maintain existing expansion joints and control joints in underlayment.
3. Apply a final layer without aggregate if required to produce smooth surface.
4. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
C. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a •
"hollow" sound when tapped.
D. Do not install finish flooring over underlayment until after time period recommended by underlayment
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 03542
•
;•
• ,
CEMENT -BASED UNDERLAYMENT 03542 -3
4 t -
. 01/16/09' -• GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
• 03542-4 CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENT
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 05400 - COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Exterior load- bearing wall framing.
2. Interior load - bearing wall framing.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide cold- formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads without
deflections greater than the following:
1. Interior Load - Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold - formed metal framing; fabrication;
and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.
C. Mill certificates or test reports.
D. Welder certificates.
E. Research/evaluation reports.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with AIS1's "Specification for the Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" for calculating
structural characteristics of cold- formed metal framing.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop
Drawings, and other structural data.
C. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency.
D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.l, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel," and
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - -Sheet Steel."
COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire- resistance -rated assembly, provide
framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fire - Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA -600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or
by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing
agency.
F. Comply with HUD's "Prescriptive Method for Residential Cold - Formed Steel Framing."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Allied American Studco, Inc.
2. Angeles Metal Systems.
3. California Expanded Metal Products Co.
4. California Metal Systems, Inc.
5. Clark Steel Framing Industries.
6. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.
7. Consolidated Systems, Inc.
8. Design Shapes in Steel.
9. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
10. Knorr Steel Framing Systems.
11. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc.
12. Scafco Corp.
13. Steel Construction Systems.
14. Steel Developers, LLC.
15. Steeler, Inc.
16. Studco of Hawaii, Inc.
17. Super Stud Building Products, Inc.
18. Unimast, Inc.
19. United Metal Products, Inc.
20. Western Metal Lath.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating, Grade 33 (230) for minimum
uncoated steel thickness of 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm) and less; Grade 50 (340) for minimum uncoated steel thickness
of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and greater.
B. Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard steel studs, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, complying
with ASTM C 955, and as follows:
1. Minimum Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0428 inch (1.09 mm).
2. Flange Width: 1 -5/8 inches (41 mm), min or as indicated on the plans.
3. Section Properties: As indicated on the drawings.
4. Track: Manufacturer's standard U- shaped steel track, unpunched, with straight flanges, complying with
ASTM C 955, manufacturer's standard flange width, and minimum uncoated -steel thickness matching steel
studs.
05400 -2 COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fabricate steel- framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum
yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123.
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon -steel headless, hooked bolts and carbon -steel nuts; and
flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.
D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a
load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent
testing agency.
E. Power- Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -
resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined
by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
F. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion - resistant - coated, self - drilling, self - threading steel drill screws.
G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC -Paint 20 or DOD -P- 21035.
H. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of I
part cement to 2 -1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Preparation: Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on
supporting concrete or masonry construction. contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or
masonry construction.
B. Install cold - formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely
fastened, according to ASTM C 1007, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section.
1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.
2. Fasten cold- formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator.
Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.
3. Install framing members in one -piece lengths.
4. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those
for which structure was designed.
5. Install insulation in built -up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple
studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.
6. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched
openings.
C. Erection Tolerances: Install cold- formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable
tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:
I. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location.
Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing
materials.
COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING 05400 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
D. Load - Bearing Wall Installation: Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks
accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends. Squarely seat studs against webs of top and bottom tracks.
Space studs as indicated, set plumb, align, and fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks.
1. Align studs vertically where wall- framing continuity is interrupted by floor framing. Where studs cannot
be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.
2. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to
transfer loads.
3. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as
indicated.
4. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated.
Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete
with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.
5. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings.
6. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip
angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full- height wall studs.
7. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten at each stud
intersection.
8. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, blocking, bracing, web
stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -
framing system.
E. Non - Load - Bearing, Curtain -Wall Installation: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks
accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure. Space studs as indicated; set plumb, align, and fasten both
flanges of studs to track, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Isolate non -load- bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while
providing lateral support.
2. Install horizontal bridging in curtain -wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more
than 54 inches (1370 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.
3. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,
continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud gins, to provide a complete and stable curtain -wall- framing
system.
F. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold- formed
metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing.
. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspection.
2. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.
3. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of
corrected Work with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 05400
05400 -4 COLD - FORMED METAL FRAMING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART I - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal fabrications to support any of the following:
1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.
2. Shelf angles.
3. Loose bearing and leveling plates.
4. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections.
5. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel angle corner guards, steel edgings, and loading -dock edge angles.
6. Aluminum support framing internal to entry portal and for concealed support of metal panel assemblies.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
C. Related Sections include Division 07412 Section "Metal Wall Panels."
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Fabricate and install framing for operable partitions, doors, grilles and other equipment so
that, when installed, it is capable of supporting all deadloads and withstanding the live loads imposed on it from its
operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings including plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and attachments to other
Work.
2. For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements, include structural analysis data, for
information only, signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for
this Project for a minimum of 5 years, with a record of successful in- service performance, with sufficient production
capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work.
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of metal fabrications that are similar to those
indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DI.1, "Structural Welding Code -- Steel."
D. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if
pertinent, has undergone recertification.
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and other construction, verify dimensions by field
measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and
fitting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METALS
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with
smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled
trade names, or roughness.
B. Ferrous Metals:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2. Steel Tubing: Cold- formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500, or hot formed steel tubing complying
with ASTM A 501.
3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S — Seamless, Grade A suitable for close coiling or cold bending, standard
weight (Schedule 40) minimum, unless otherwise indicated or required to satisfy performance requirements,
black finish.
4. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold- formed metal channels 1 -5/8 by 1 -5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm) with flange edges
returned toward web and with 9/16 -inch- (14.3 -mm -) wide slotted holes in webs at 2 inches (51 mm) o.c.
Channels made from galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 33
(Grade 230), with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.079 -inch (2 -mm) nominal thickness.
5. Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 (ASTM A 47M, Grade 22010) malleable iron or ASTM A 48,
Class 30 (ASTM A 48M, Class 200) gray iron.
2.2 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless -steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated
fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe /Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless -steel
fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Provide hot -dip or mechanically deposited, zinc- coated anchor bolts
where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.
C. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the
load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing
agency.
I. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per
ASTM A 153/A I53M.
2. Slotted type; galvanized 1/8" thick pressured steel plate, ASTM A283; box -type welded construction with slot
designed to receive square head bolt and with knockout cover; hot -dip galvanized.
D. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six
times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete,
as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc - plated to comply with ASTM B 633,
05500 -2 METAL FABRICATIONS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
Class Fe /Zn 5.
2.3 PAINT
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast - curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying
with performance requirements in FS TT-P -664 and compatible with finish paint systems indicated.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory - packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural
value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
1. Welded connections may be used where bolted connections are shown.
B. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
C. Weld corners and seams continuously along entire line of contact. Use materials and methods that minimize
distortion and develop strength of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux
immediately. Finish exposed welds smooth and blended.
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Use
exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate
joints where least conspicuous. Make up threaded connections tight so that threads are entirely concealed.
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring
devices and fasteners to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.
G. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Provide steel framing and supports indicated and as necessary to complete the
Work and which are not a part of the structural framework, including but not limited to framing and supports for
overhead lobby door frames, accordion folding partitions, operable partitions, overhead rolling doors and grilles,
sliding doors, countertop and vanities, ceiling hung toilet compartments, projection screens, ceiling hung televisions
and cameras, tube framing for partial height walls, mechanical and electrical equipment.
1. Fabricate units from structural -steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated.
Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by
framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
2. Modular Structural Framing System: ASTM A569; modular, structural quality steel pre- formed "U" channel
framing system with continuous open slot prepared to receive attachment nuts, bolts, straps, threaded rods,
beam clamps, hanger rods support brackets and other accessories. Provide manufacturers standard corrosion
resistant finish.
3. Provide steel rods, 1/2 -inch- (13 -mm) diameter, spaced not more than 36 inch- (914 -mm) o.c. Thread rods to
receive anchor and stop nuts. Fit hangers with wedge shape washers for full bearing on sloping flanges of
support beam.
2.6 FINISHES
A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Shop prime ferrous -metal items.
I. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces by removing oil, grease, and similar
contaminants in accordance with SSPC -SP I "Solvent Cleaning," followed with SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool
METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Cleaning."
2. Apply a minimum of one coat of shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those to be field
welded, and those to be embedded in sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply
with SSPC -PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing metal fabrications to in -place construction. Perform
cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location,
with edges and surfaces level, plumb, and true. Drill holes for bolts to the exact diameter of the bolt. Provide screws
threaded full length to the screw head.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as
exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after
finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.
D. Touch up surfaces and finishes after erection. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and touch up
paint with the same material as used for shop painting.
END OF SECTION 05500
05500 -4 METAL FABRICATIONS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 05730 - ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes Stainless steel base and trim.
B. See Division 5 Section "Ornamental Metal" for items made primarily from plate, bars, extrusions, tubes, castings,
and other forms of metal, but which may include sheet metal components.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of components and their connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items.
C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) square samples of metal of
same thickness and material indicated for the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL
A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other
imperfections where exposed to view on finished units.
B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher - leveled standard of flatness.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in ornamental formed metal, and as recommended in writing by ornamental
formed -metal manufacturer.
1. Flexible Cellular Neoprene Gaskets: ASTM D 1056, Type 1, Class A, grade as recommended by gasket
manufacturer to obtain airtight seal for application indicated.
B. Sealants, Interior: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834; and as
recommended in writing by ornamental formed -metal manufacturer.
1. Use sealant that has a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Type and alloy as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in
fabricated items and that will match the color of metal being joined.
D. Fasteners: Use fasteners fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide Phillips flat -head machine screws for exposed fasteners.
ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. Anchors: Provide powder- actuated fasteners, metal expansion sleeve anchors or metal impact expansion anchors
of type, size, and material recommended by manufacturer. Use nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors
for exterior installations.
F. Sound - Deadening Materials:
1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral -fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing
ASTM E 136 test.
2. Mastic: Cold- applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
G. Isolation Coating: Manufacturer's standard bituminous paint or epoxy coating.
H. Adhesive tape: 3M; VBH Tape, 0.045 inch thickness.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble ornamental formed -metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly.
B. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2 -inch- (12 -mm -) wide hem on the concealed
side.
C. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide
surface flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use.
1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush
alignment.
D. Where welding is indicated, weld joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush,
exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
1. Stainless steel finish: NAAMM No. 4 satin directional polish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place ornamental formed -metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Use adhesive anchoring where indicated in Drawings.
C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants
and joint fillers as indicated.
D. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work.
Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or
provide new units.
05730 -2 ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
END OF SECTION 05730
•
•
•
•
ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL 05730 -3
_ •
• a :
•
•
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
• WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
05730 -4 ORNAMENTAL FORMED METAL
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior standing and running trim for field - painted finish.
2. Interior portal trim for field- painted finish.
3. Installation of prefinished interior standing and running trim.
4. Interior cased openings.
5. Applied trim on interior flush wood doors.
6. Interior plywood and fiberboard display platform.
7. Paneling and wainscots.
8. Shelving and clothes rods.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop- fabricated interior woodwork.
2. Division 9 Section "Painting" for priming and backpriming of finish carpentry.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:
1. NELMA - Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association.
2. NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
3. NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority.
4. SCMA - Southern Cypress Manufacturers Association.
5. WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
6. WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory- fabricated product. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, textures, and colors.
1. Include data for fire- retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating
plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.
B. Samples for Verification:
1. For each species and cut of lumber and panel products with nonfactory - applied finish, with 1/2 of exposed
surface finished, 50 sq. in. (300 sq. cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (203 by 250 mm) for panels.
2. For each finish system and color of lumber and panel products with factory- applied finish, 50 sq. in. (300 sq.
cm) for lumber and 8 by 10 inches (203 by 250 mm) for panels.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Showing that fire- retardant - treated wood complies with building code in effect for
Project.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels.
Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation
areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where environmental conditions
meet requirements specified for installation areas.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber
Standards' Committee Board of Review.
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture
content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece.
B. Hardwood Plywood: HPVA HP -1.
1. Birch finish -grade plywood where indicated in Drawings.
C. Hardboard: AHA A 135.4
D. Medium - Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.
1. Products:
a. SierraPine Ltd.; Medite II standard.
b. SierraPine Ltd.; Medite II FR where fire- retardant products are required.
E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2 Exterior Glue.
F. Strawboard: ANSI A208.1 Grade M -3. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Dow BioProducts, Ltd., a division of Dow Chemical Company; WoodStalk.
2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM, WINDOWS AND CASED OPENINGS
A. Lumber Trim for Opaque Finish (Painted): Finished lumber (S4S), either finger jointed or solid lumber, of one of
the following species and grades:
1. Grade A Finish alder, aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple, sycamore, tupelo, or yellow
poplar; NHLA.
B. Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish: See Division 9 Section "Wood Flooring."
06200 -2 FINISH CARPENTRY
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7, or to patterns indicated by manufacturer's designations.
Wood moldings made from kiln -dried stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4.
1. Moldings for Opaque Finish (Painted): P -grade aspen, basswood, cottonwood, gum, magnolia, soft maple,
tupelo, or yellow poplar.
2. Patterns: As indicated in Drawings.
D. Accessories: Hooks, pegs, decorative trim, and similar items as indicated in Drawings, for Opaque Finish (Painted)..
2.3 SHELVING AND CLOTHES RODS
A. Shelving: 3/4 -inch (19 -mm) strawboard shelving with solid -wood front edge.
1. Fixed Shelf Brackets: Prime - painted formed steel, with provision to support clothes rod where rod is indicated.
B. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Brackets:
1. Standards: Crown Metal; products as selected in Gap purchase agreement; lengths as indicated in Drawings.
2. Brackets: Crown Metal; products as selected in Gap purchase agreement.
C. Clothes Rods: 1 -1/2 -inch- (38 -mm -) diameter, aluminum tubes.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type, size, material, and finish
required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible.
1. Where finish carpentry materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with
hot -dip galvanized coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.
B. Glue: Aliphatic- or phenolic -resin wood glue recommended by manufacturer for general carpentry use.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufacturer's
written recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry at relative humidity conditions existing during
time of fabrication and in installation areas.
B. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in finished work:
1. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe and crown molds.
2. Wood board paneling.
C. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to I /16 -inch (1.5 -mm) radius and edges of
lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) radius.
D. Backprime all pieces of standing and running trim, window frames, and cased openings scheduled for opaque finish.
See Division 9 section "Painting."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Before installing finish carpentry, condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas for a
minimum of 24 hours, unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to
fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where
necessary for alignment.
1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by manufacturer.
2. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable.
3. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining finish
carpentry with I/32 -inch (0.8 -mm) maximum offset for flush installation and I /16 -inch (1.5 -mm) maximum
offset for reveal installation.
4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and
electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry.
3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION
A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full - length pieces from maximum lengths of lumber
available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent
and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight - fitting joints with full -
surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for end -to -end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide
uniform thickness across joints, where necessary for alignment.
1. Match color and grain pattern across joints.
2. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping.
Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish carpentry may be repaired or
refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for
uniform appearance.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory - applied finishes to restore damaged
or soiled areas.
END OF SECTION 06200
06200 -4 FINISH CARPENTRY
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior woodwork including for the following applications:
1. Wood stile and rail doors.
2. Wood frames and jambs.
3. Blind door frames.
4. Shop finishing of woodwork.
5. Installation of woodwork fabricated under this section and by others.
B. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips, unless concealed within
other construction before woodwork installation.
C. RELATED SECTIONS
1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for steel frames installed with stile and rail wood doors.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for flush wood doors installed in wood frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for hardware installed with stile and rail wood doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Cabinet hardware and accessories.
2. Finishing materials and processes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include location of each item, plans and elevations, large -scale details, attachment devices, parts
and materials list, and other components.
C. Samples:
1. Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of woodwork.
B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for
grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements.
C. NWWDA Quality Standard: NWWDA I.S.6, "Industry Standard for Stile and Rail Doors."
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete,
and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels planned for building
occupants during the remainder of the construction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wood for Transparent Finish:
1. Species and Cut: As indicated in Drawings.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
B. Wood for Paint Finish:
1. Species: Yellow poplar or Birch, where indicated in Drawings.
C. Wood Products:
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
2. Medium Density Fiberboard: Subject to compliance with ANSI A208.2, provide one of the following:
a. CanFiber Group Ltd.; Allgreen.
b. SierraPine Ltd.; Medite II.
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -2- Exterior Glue.
a. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Resincore -I by Rodman Industries.
4. Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP -1.
D. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard or medium - density fiberboard with surface of thermally fused,
melamine - impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1.
E. High- Pressure Decorative Laminates PL401 and PL402: NEMA LD 3.
1. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Finish
Schedule.
2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS
A. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. AWI Grade for 1 -3/4" Interior Flat Panel Doors: Custom.
2. Stile and Rail Construction: Clear softwood, edge glued for width or finger jointed, or laminated- strand lumber
with softwood edges and veneers.
3. Flat Panel: Medium - density fiberboard.
4. Stile, Top and Intermediate Rail Widths: As indicated on drawings.
5. Flat Panel Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm) for partial height doors and 1 -1/8" for doors exceeding 7' -0" height.
6. Finish: Shop prime exposed portions of doors for paint finish with one coat of wood primer specified in
Division 9 Section "Painting."
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln -dried to less than 15 percent
moisture content.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Where necessary for
fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
I. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom complying with the referenced quality standard.
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.
3. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
4. For trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered construction. Do not glue for width.
5. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members
with ends exposed in finished work.
6. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly.
B. Plastic- Laminate Paneling and Column Covers:
1. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High - pressure decorative of grade indicated.
a. Vertical Surfaces: VGS.
b. Edges: VGS or PVC tape, 0.018 -inch (0.460 -mm) minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern,
and finish.
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations in Finish Schedule.
06402 -2 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Interior Frames and Jambs: Products fabricated from particleboard or medium - density fiberboard, or as indicated on
Drawings.
D. Stile and Rail Doors:
1. Factory fit doors to suit frame - opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced
quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors.
2. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
2.5 SHOP FINISHING
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after
installation, except where field painting is indicated in Drawings.
B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork.
1. Apply two coats to back of paneling.
C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, with
sheen measured on 60- degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. AWI Finish System: Match sample, with performance not less than TR -4, conversion varnish.
3. Staining: Match sample.
4. Sheen: Match sample gloss units.
D. Paint Finish: Shop prime for field painting according to Division 9 Section "Painting."
1. Prime all sides of all pieces of blind door frames.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. The requirements of this Article apply to woodwork fabricated as part of the work of this Section and to woodwork
fabricated under separate contract.
B. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas and examine and complete work
as required, including removal of packing and backpriming before installation.
C. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for the same grade specified in this Section
for type of woodwork involved.
D. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Shim
as required with concealed shims.
E. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts.
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,
concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing
screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent
finish is indicated.
G. Install wood doors to comply with referenced quality standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Factory- Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
END OF SECTION 06402
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06402 -3
. 01/16/09 GAP;.INC.
'WASHINGTON.SQUARETTIGARD,'OR -.STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
•
. ,
•
06402-4 • INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 07412 - METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes metal -faced composite wall panels with post - applied automotive finish for interior use.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for aluminum support framing internal to entry portal and for concealed
support of metal panel assemblies.
2. Division 5 Section "Cold- Formed Metal Framing" for secondary support framing supporting metal wall panels.
3. Division 5 Section "Ornamental Formed Metal" for stainless steel base.
4. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for sheathing.
5. Division 7 Section "Self- Adhered Sheet Waterproofing" for waterproofing behind metal panels.
6. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field- applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section.
1.2 DEFINITION
A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous metal framing, and
accessories necessary for a complete weathertight system.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide metal wall panel assemblies that comply with performance requirements specified as determined
by testing manufacturers' standard assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project, by a qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to
ASTM E 330:
1. Deflection Limits: Engineer metal wall panel assemblies to withstand test pressures with deflection no greater
than 1/240 of the span and no evidence of material failure, structural distress, or permanent deformation
exceeding 0.2 percent of the clear span.
C. Seismic Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures ": Section 9,
"Earthquake Loads."
D. Thermal Movements: Provide metal wall panel assemblies that allow for thermal movements resulting from the
following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints,
overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,
and finishes for each type of metal wall panel and accessory.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge conditions, joints,
panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.
Distinguish between factory- and field- assembled work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed
by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.
I. Metal Wall Panels: 4 inches (102 mm) square.
2. Exposed Sealants: For each type and color of joint sealant required. Install joint sealants in 1/2 -inch- (I3 -mm -)
wide joints formed between two 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) long strips of material matching the appearance of metal
wall panels adjacent to joint sealants.
D. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
E. Qualification Data: For Installer.
F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion
with joint sealants.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for the
following:
I. Metal Wall Panels: Include reports for air infiltration, water penetration, and structural performance.
H. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.
I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: At least 5 years' experience installing metal -faced composite wall panels.
B. Engineering Responsibility: Comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.
C. Source: RDS- Jay Stemler (763)633 -3003- jstemler @RDS - mn.com
D. Fabricator Limitations and Qualifications: Obtain each type of metal wall panel and panel support system through
Owner's approved fabricator.
I . Contact: See 1.5 C. Source, above.
2. Fabricator shall be certified by metal -faced composite wall panel manufacturer to fabricate and install
manufacturer's wall panel system.
E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint - sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated
below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.
I. Use manufacturer's standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.
a. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation.
2. Submit no fewer than nine pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint - sealant
backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.
3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.
4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures.
including the use of specially formulated primers.
07412 -2 METAL WALL PANELS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel assemblies
including, but not limited to, the following:
I. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment,
and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
2. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and attachment to
structural members.
4. Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other construction that
will affect metal wall panels.
5. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing and inspecting if
applicable.
6. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and after installation.
7. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation.
8. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each
participant.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed.
Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and handling.
B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage.
C. Store metal -faced composite wall panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated covering.
Store metal -faced composite wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store
metal -faced composite wall panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface
damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 deg F (49 deg C).
D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal wall panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to
extent necessary for period of metal wall panel installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by field measurements before metal wall
panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, either
establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal wall panels without field
measurements, or allow for field trimming of panels. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual
building dimensions, locations of structural members, and openings correspond to established dimensions.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with sheathing and waterproofing work, flashing, trim, and construction of
storefront framing and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
I. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Finish manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of shop- applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1. High -Gloss Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.
2. Finish Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL -FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANELS
A. General: Provide factory- formed and - assembled metal -faced composite wall panels fabricated from two metal
facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid extruded thermoplastic core; formed into profile for installation
method indicated. Include attachment system components and accessories required for weathertight system.
B. Aluminum -Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020 -inch- (0.50 -mm -) thick, coil- coated aluminum sheet
facings.
1. Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch (4 mm).
2. Core: Standard.
3. Exterior Finish: As supplied by Owner- approved fabricator.
C. Attachment System Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.
1. Allow individual panels to "free float" and be installed and removed without disturbing adjacent panels.
2. Include manufacturer's standard panel stiffeners.
3. Panel Clips: As supplied by Owner- approved fabricator.
D. Flashing and Trim: Same material, finish, and color as facings of adjacent composite panels, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Flashing and Trim: Formed from 0.0179 -inch- (0.45 -mm -) thick, zinc - coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum -
zinc alloy- coated steel sheet. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings,
rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent
metal wall panels.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Internal Support of Entry Portals: See Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications ".
B. Fasteners: Self - tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self - locking rivets and bolts, end - welded studs, and other suitable
fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall
panels by means of plastic caps or factory- applied coating.
I. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self- drilling or self - tapping 410 stainless or zinc -alloy steel hex washer head, with
EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of metal wall panels.
2. Fasteners for Hashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self - drilling screws with hex washer head.
3. Blind Fasteners: High- strength aluminum or stainless -steel rivets.
07412 -4 METAL WALL PANELS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Bituminous Coating: Cold- applied asphalt mastic, SSPC -Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil (0.4 -mm) dry film
thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other
deleterious impurities.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate metal wall panels and accessories at the shop to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's
standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated by
laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp and buckle.
2. Fabricate wall panels with panel stiffeners as required to maintain fabrication tolerances and to withstand design
loads.
3. Shop- fabricate entry portal as a complete unit, capable of supporting itself and the loads imposed upon it.
B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel and with joints
between panels designed to form weathertight seals.
C. Metal -Faced Composite Wall Panels: Shop form panels in a continuous process with no glues or adhesives between
dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core
material.
1. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached to back of panels
with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.
2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion of core material.
3. Dimensional Tolerances:
a. Length: Plus 0.375 inch (9.5 mm).
b. Width: Plus 0.188 inch (4.8 mm).
c. Thickness: Plus or minus 0.008 inch (0.2 mm).
d. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.
e. Squareness: 0.2 inch (5 mm) maximum.
D. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item
indicated.
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that
are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy
seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.
3 Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat -lock seams. Tin edges
to be seamed, form seams, and solder.
4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply
with SMACNA standards.
5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of
accessories exposed to view.
6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible,
noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal wall panel
manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for
applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary
protective covering before shipping.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are
within one -half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and
are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
D. High -Gloss Finish System: Provide finish as specified in Division 9 Section "High -Gloss Coatings."
2.6 FACTORY FINISH SYSTEM
A. Factory Finish System: Complete system of compatible preparation and finishing components that is provided by
Owner's approved fabriator for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Examine solid wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that
installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel manufacturer.
B. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual locations of
penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel installation.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Install flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal
Flashing and Trim."
3.3 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Install metal wall panels in orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Anchor metal wall
panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.
1. Field cutting of metal wall panels is not permitted.
2. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.
3. Rigidly fasten base end of metal wall panels and allow eave end free movement due to thermal expansion and
contraction. Predrill panels.
4. Flash and seal metal wall panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and at perimeter of all openings. Fasten
with self- tapping screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by
metal wall panels are installed.
5. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.
6. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.
7. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.
8. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports.
B. Fasteners:
1. Aluminum Wall Panels: Use aluminum or stainless -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and
aluminum or galvanized steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic
action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized- asphalt underlayment to each
contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
07412 -6 METAL WALL PANELS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
D. Joint Sealers:
1. Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of
metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types
recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.4 METAL -FACED COMPOSITE WALL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. General: Install attachment system required to support wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall
system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.
1. Include attachment to supports, panel -to -panel joinery, panel -to- dissimilar- material joinery, and panel- system
joint seals.
2. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be concealed by composite panels are
installed.
B. Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at each wall panel joint at locations, spacings, and with fasteners
recommended by manufacturer. Attach routed - and - returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with
manufacturer's standard fasteners.
1. Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent panels with sealant backing and sealant. Install sealant
backing and sealant according to requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal
expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather
resistant.
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true
to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim
to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather - resistant performance.
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at
a maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection. Where
lapped or bayonet -type expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and
waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled
with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal wall panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6
mm in 6 m), nonaccumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) offset of
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are installed, unless
otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal wall panel
installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean
condition during construction.
B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and sealant. Wash
and dry panels according to finish system manufacturer's written instructions.
METAL WALL PANELS 07412 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup
or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 07412
07412 -8 METAL WALL PANELS
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through - penetration firestop systems for, penetrations through the following fire-
. resistance -rated assemblies, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items:
1. Floors.
2. Roofs.
3. Walls and partitions.
4. Smoke barriers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Sprayed Fire - Resistive Materials."
2. Division 15 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations.
3. Division' 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For the following constructions, provide through - penetration firestop systems that are
produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of
smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly penetrated.
1. Fire - resistance -rated load - bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection -rated openings.
2. Fire - resistance -rated non - load - bearing walls, including' partitions, with fire- protection -rated
openings.
3. Fire - resistance -rated floor assemblies.
4. Fire - resistance -rated roof assemblies.
B. F -Rated Systems: Provide through - penetration firestop systems with F- ratings indicated, as determined
,• by tests conducted according to UBC Standard 7 -5, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire -
resistance rating of constructions penetrated. F- rating shall be not "less than the required rating of the
element penetrated, but not less than 1 hour, minimum
C. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through - penetration firestop systems with T-
ratings indicated, as well as F- ratings, as determined per UBC Standard 7 -5, where systems protect
penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
1. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
2. . Penetrations located outside fire- resistive shaft enclosures.
3. Penetrations located in construction containing fire- protection -rated openings.
4. Penetrating items larger than 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. (10 sq. mm)
in overall cross- sectional area.
5. Provide T- rating not less than the required rating of the element penetrated, but not less than 1
hour, minimum.
THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
D. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage,
provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and
after construction.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture - resistant
through - penetration firestop systems.
2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100 mm) in width and exposed to
possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved
either by installing floor plates or by other means.
3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through - penetration firestop systems not
requiring removal of insulation.
E. For through - penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame- spread ratings of
less than 25 and smoke - developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Through- Penetration Firestopping Schedule: Submit, for information only, a Through- Penetration
Firestopping Schedule indicating the type of through - penetration firestop system to be installed for each
penetration. Indicate each kind of construction condition penetrated and kind of penetrating item.
Include firestop design designation of Underwriter's Laboratories that evidences compliance with
requirements for each condition indicated, and listed in the "Through Penetration Firestopping
Schedule" at the end of Part 3 of this Section.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from Underwriter's Laboratories applicable to
each through - penetration firestop.
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through - penetration firestop system products
certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.
C. At Project Closeout, submit a list of systems installed, the UL design designations, and the location of
each system. The submittal must have the Installer's signature.
I.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified or licensed, by firestop system manufacturer as
experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified
requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestop system materials to Contractor or to an
installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain through - penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and
construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that comply with the
following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article:
. Firestop tests performed by Underwriter's Laboratories.
2. Through - penetration firestop systems identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated
systems complying with the following requirements.
07841 -2 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
a. Through - penetration firestop system products bearing classification marking of
Underwriter's Laboratories.
b. Through- penetration firestop systems corresponding to those indicated by reference to
through - penetration firestop system designations listed in the UL "Fire Resistance
Directory."
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver through - penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or
packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of
manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification
marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multi- component materials.
B. Store and handle materials for through - penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through - penetration firestop systems when ambient or
substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through - penetration firestop system
manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
B. Ventilate through - penetration firestop systems per manufacturers written instructions by natural means
or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through - penetration firestop
systems are installed according to specified requirements.
B. Provide through - penetration firestop systems to accommodate sizes of sleeves, openings, core - drilled
holes, or cut openings.
C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through - penetration firestop system
installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.
D. Do not cover up through - penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind
other construction until Architect, Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by
authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide through - penetration firestop
systems that are produced by manufacturers listed in UL- Classified Through Penetration Fire
Stopping Assemblies in the Schedule at the end of Part 3 of this Section.
2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through - penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another, with
the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating through - penetration firestop
systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through - penetration firestop
system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through - penetration firestop system needed to install fill
materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by
through - penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by Underwriter's Laboratories for
firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming /backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag- /rock - wool -fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming /backing materials to prevent
leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire -rated form board.
2. Substrate primers.
3. Collars.
C. Gypsum Products: The use of gypsum products for through - penetration firestopping is strictly
prohibited.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with UL firestopping design
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through - penetration firestop
systems to comply with written recommendations of firestop system manufacturer and the following
requirements:
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that
could interfere with adhesion of through - penetration firestop systems.
07841 -4 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of
developing optimum bond with through - penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation.
3. Remove laitance and form- release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through - penetration firestop system
manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas
of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.
C. Protection: Prevent through - penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will
remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged
by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove
smears as soon as possible without damaging substrate or disturbing firestop system's seal with
substrates.
3.3 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through - penetration firestop systems to comply with "Performance Requirements"
Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for
products and applications indicated.
B. Install forming/damming /backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill
materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross - sectional shapes and
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.
1. After installing fill materials, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not
indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items
as required to achieve fire- resistance ratings indicated.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating
items.
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth,
uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect through -
penetration firestop systems and to prepare test reports.
1. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected through - penetration firestop
systems comply with or deviate from requirements.
2. Proceed with enclosing through - penetration firestop systems with other construction only after
inspection reports are issued.
3. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through - penetration firestop systems so they
comply with requirements.
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through - penetration firestop systems with pressure- sensitive, self - adhesive, preprinted vinyl
labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces of penetrated construction on both sides of each firestop
system installation where labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or
firestop systems. Include the following information on labels:
1. The words: "Warning -- Through- Penetration Firestop System - -Do Not Disturb. Notify Building
Management of Any Damage."
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
3. Through - penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
4. Date of installation.
5. Through - penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.
6. Installer's name.
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials that are approved in writing by through - penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do
not damage materials in which openings occur.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure through -
penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated
through - penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce through -
penetration firestop systems complying with specified requirements.
SCHEDULE 1 - THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE
A. Select UL- classified systems from the attached schedule and submit "Through- Penetration Firestopping
Schedule" as specified in Article 1.3, Submittals.
07841 - THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING SCHEDULE
THIS SCHEDULE INDICATES WHICH SERIES OF UL CLASSIFIED THROUGH PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING (TPFS) ASSEMBLIES ARE ACCEPTABLE FOR THIS
PROJECT BASED ON BARRIER TYPE, BARRIER CONSTRUCTION AND PENETRANT TYPE
EACH SYSTEM WITHIN A GIVEN SERIES IS CLASSIFIED FOR SPECIFIC PENETRATION CONDITIONS. CONTRACTOR SHALL SELECT TPFS ASSEMBLIES THAT
ARE CLASSIFIED FOR USE WITH EACH PENETRATION'S CONDITION BASED ON CRITERIA SUCH AS THE FOLLOWING:
PENETRATION SIZE, PENETRATION SHAPE, PENETRANT SIZE(S), PENETRANT MATERIAL(S), PENETRANT QUANTITY, LOCATIONS(S) OF PENETRANT(S)
WITHIN PENETRATION.
BARRIER PENETRANT TYPE I
isi W N N Cl) F
d
a.4 a s a WFZ WFZpF o Cl) z
a
z � h W o u1 c) a P-" - F U Z Q� O vi
A .7� ^ W a .c ,. � F W W
U c„ W E U1 , 4 F -, M W V E" a a. W W U E - , U cn
] Z F Ui n d W co F z O W Z z O o H z o U U H
F FIRE STOPPING C a zz CO H m m a fA � ° a0 O E. ao a. O w co Z �> U 3 � � ,, �Ww p„�W �� O
REQUIREMENTS w 43
() W Z�.� 0. �. O. W c, f 0. U1�CW UW < .] Cl) H
0
CI) z '�- O O a . . E; > H U dd Z E aa " a- z WQ V d � H 0:
d �V ,7, W .-I .a W . ] W W -,c4;_ .4 E. C E.
W 70.WQ .`70.W H W.. a
W
CO 0a
X O O p U z Q HH " U m�� 0 O
CO
Z Oa a
WOOD W- L-1000 W- L-2000 W- L-5000 W -L -5000 W -L -6000 W L -7000 CLIV OR NOTE NOTE 8
WALL STUDS & SINGLE SERIES SERIES SERIES SERIES SERIES SERIES 8
GYPSUM UL CLASSI- PENE- W -L W -L-
WALLBRD 000 W -L-
FIED TRANT SER- 3000 4000 W -L -8000 W -L -8000
MUL- W -L -8000 SERIES SERIE
SYSTEM TIPLE IES OR NOTE 5 S SERIES SERIES SERIES N/A N/A N/A
NOTE 9 NOTE 5 NOTE 5
UL DESIGN NO - PENE-
U300 SERIES TRANTS
EQUAL TO BARRIER
F RATING RATING
EQUAL TO F RATING
T RATING (NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NOTE6 NONE NOTE 7 NONE NONE
W -L -1000 W -L -2000 W -L-5000 W -L -5000 W -1. -6000 W -L -7000 CLIV OR NOTE NOTE 8
WALL METAL SINGLE SERIES SERIES SERIES SERIES SERIES SERIES 8
STUDS & UL CLASS]- PENE- W -L. W -L
GYPSUM FLED TRANT 0000 3000 W -L
WALLBRD SER- 4000 W -L -8000 W -L -8000
MUL IES OR W-L-8000 SERIES SER- SERIES SERIES SERIES N/A N/A N/A
SYSTEM TIPLE NOTE 9 NOTE 5 IES NOTE 5 NOTE 5
UL DESIGN NO. PENE-
U400 SERIES TRANTS
EQUAL TO
BARRIER
F RATING RATING
EQUAL TO F RATING
T RATING (NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NOTE6 NONE NOTE7 NONE NONE
C -AJ- C -AJ -2000 C -AJ -7000
WALL I POURED SINGLE 1000 OR OR W -J- C -AJ- C -AJ -5000 C -AJ -5000 I NOTE 8
OR W -J-
CONC., W -J- C -AJ- OR W -J -5000 OR W -J -5000
UL CLASSI- PENE- W -J -1000 2000 3000 7000
CONC. 0000 4000 OR SERIES SERIES
BLOCK OR F1ED TRANT SER SERIES SERIES OR W. W J C -AJ -6000 SERIES
MASONRY MUL- IES OR C -AJ -8000 OR W -J- J -3000 4000 C -AJ -8000 C -AJ -8000 SERIES
SYSTEM TIPLE NOTE 4 8000 SERIES -- NOTE SERIF SERIES OR W -J -8000 OR W -J -8000 N/A N/A
PENE- S SERIES - SERIES -
UL DESIGN NO TRANTS 5 NOTE 5 NOTE 5
FOR CONCRETE EQUAL TO
BLOCK WALL - BARRIER
U900 SERIES (ANY F RATING RATING
THICKNESS) EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE I NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NOTE6 NONE NOTE7 NONE I NONE
THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C -BK- I NOTE 8
WALL POURED SINGLE 1000 OR N/A N/A N/A N/A
CONC. UL CLASSI- PENE- W -K -1000
BLOCK OR FIED TRANT SERIES W -K- N/A
MASONRY MUL NOTE 4 N/A 4000 N/A
SYSTEM TIPLE SERIES
UL DESIGN NO. PENE- N/A
FOR CONCRETE TRANTS
BLOCK WALL - EQUAL TO BARRIER
U900 SERIES F RATING RATING
MINIMUM
THICKNESS EQUAL TO
GREATER THAN F RATING
EIGHT INCHES T RATING _NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE
(FRAMED NOTE
FLOOR SINGLE F -C -1000 F -C -2000 F -C -5000 F -C -5000 F -C -7000 NOTE 8
UL CLASSI- PENE- SERIES SERIES F.C. SERIES SERIES SERIES
FLED T NOTE 4 SER- N/A N/A
MUL-
SYSTEM TIPLE F -C -8000 SERIES IES F -C -6000 F -C -8000
PENE- NOTE 5 SERIES SERIES N/A N/A
TRANTS NOTE 5 NOTE 5
EQUAL TO
BARRIER
F RATING RATING
EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING _(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NOTE 6 NONE NOTE 7 NONE NONE
I POURED C -AJ- C -AJ- C -AJ -2000 C-AJ -7000
NOTE 8
FLOOR C -AJ -5000 C -AJ -5000 CONC. SINGLE 0000 1000 OR OR F -A- C -AJ- OR FA-5000 OR F -A -5000 OR F -A- NOTE 8
UL CLASSI- PENE- SER- F -A -1000 2000 C -AJ- 7000
FLED TRANT IES, SERIES SERIES 3000 4000 OR SERIES SERIES SERIES
OR F- C -AJ -6000
MUU F.A. A -3000 F.A C -AJ -8000 C -AJ -8000 SERIES
SYSTEM TIPLE 0000 C -AJ -8000 OR F -A- SE 9000 OR FA-8000 OR F -A -8000
SER- 8000 SERIES -- NOTE IES SERIES SERIES - SERIES - N/A N/A
PENE- IES OR 5 NOTE 5 NOTE 5
TRANTS NOTE 4
EQUAL TO
ANY THICKNESS BARRIER
F RATING RATING
EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING ,(NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NOTE 6 NONE NOTE 7 NONE NONE
POURED C -BJ- C -BJ -2000 C -BJ -7000
FLOOR I SINGLE NOTE 8
CONC. 1000 OR OR F -B C-BJ• C -BJ -5000 C -AJ -5000 OR F -B-
C -BJ- C.BJ- OR F- B-5000 OR FA-5000 NOTE 8
UL CLASS(- PENE- F -B -1000 2000 3000 7000
VIED TRANT 0000 SERIES SERIES OR F. 4000 OR SERIES SERIES C -AJ -6000 SERIES
MUL- IES R C -BJ -8000 OR F -B B -3000 4 0 0 p C -AJ -8000 C -BJ -8000 SERIES
SYSTEM TIPLE NOTE 4 8000 SERIES -- NOTE SER- SERIES OR F -A -8000 OR F -B -8000 N/A N/A
PENE- IES SERIES - SERIES -
TRANTS 5 NOTE 5 NOTE 5
MINIMUM EQUAL TO
THICKNESS BARRIER
GREATER THAN F RATING RATING
FIVE INCHES EQUAL TO
F RATING
T RATING (NOTE 9)
ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS NONE NONE I NONE INONEI NONE I NONE I NOTE 6 NONE I NOTE 7 NONE NONE
THIS SCHEDULE USES THE IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS OF UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES, INC. AS DEFINED IN THEIR "FIRE RESISTANCE
DIRECTORY" AND AS USED BY MANUFACTURERS ON THEIR UL CLASSIFIED SYSTEM.
INDICATED RATINGS MAY BE EXCEEDED. "N /A" = NOT APPLICABLE
07841 -8 THROUGH - PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
NOTES
1. EXAMPLES OF SYSTEMS THAT OPERATE BETWEEN 32 DEGF (ODEGC) AND 122 DEGF (50 DEGC)
CHILLED WATER SUPPLY DOMESTIC HOT WATER LESS
& RETURN THAN 122 DEGF (50 DEGC)
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
HEAT PUMP WATER RECIRCULATION LESS THAN
SUPPLY & RETURN 122 DEGF (50 DEGC)
DOMESTIC COLD WATER
2 EXAMPLES OF SYSTEMS OPERATING BELOW 32 DEGF ( ODEGC) OR ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC):
HEATING HOT WATER SUPPLY
STEAM SUPPLY & RETURN & RETURN
HOT - CHILLDED WATER
STEAM VENT SUPPLY & RETURN
CONDENSATE PUMP GLYCOL HEATING HOT
DISCHARGE WATER SUPPLY & RETURN
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
BOILER BLOW DOWN SUPPLY 190 DEGF (60 DEGC)
DOMESTIC HOT WATER
RECIRCULATION 190 DEGF (60
CRYOGENIC VENT DEGC)
3. EXAMPLES OF OTHER RECESSED DEVICES:
MEDICAL GAS ZONE
VALVES UNIT HEATERS
MEDICAL GAS OUTLETS FIRE FIGHTERS' PHONE
FIRE VALVE CABINETS • FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET
FIRE HOSE CABINETS
4 SEAL OPENING USING BARRIER'S ORIGINAL CONSTRUCTION
5 WHERE A SERIES 8000 CLASSIFIED SYSTEM IS NOT AVAILABLE, INSTALL PENETRANTS SINGLY, AND PROVIDE SINGLE - PENETRANT
SYSTEMS.
is 6. FOR SYSTEMS THAT OPERATE BELOW 32 DEGF ( ODEGC) OR ABOVE 122 DEGF (50 DEGC), COMPLY WITH THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL
REQUIREMENTS
A PROVIDE TPFS SYSTEM USING INTUMESCENT ELASTOMERIC
WRAP STRIP AS ITS FILL, VOID, OR CAVITY MATERIAL.
B. DO NOT USE SERIES 8000 PENETRATIONS. PROVIDE ONLY
SINGLE PENETRATIONS
7 FOR PENETRATIONS PROTECTED WITH DAMPERS, PROVIDE TPFS SYSTEM APPROVED BY DAMPER MANUFACTURER
• 8 WHERE UL CLASSIFIED SYSTEMS ARE NOT AVAILABLE FOR OTHER RECESSED DEVICES, MAINTAIN CONTINUITY OF RATED BARRIER
CONSTRUCTION AROUND RECESS
9 PROVIDE PILLOW TYPE FIRESTOP SYSTEM TO FILL VOIDS IN CABLE TRAYS AT COMPUTER SERVER ROOMS, AND WHERE INDICATED AS
"FREQUENTLY MODIFIED" LOCATIONS.
10 THE USE OF GYPSUM PRODUCTS IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
•
NOTE:
For Project Closeout, submit a list of systems installed, the UL num=
bers, and the location of each system. The submittal must have the
installer's signature.
END OF SECTION 07841
THROUGH- PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841 -9
01/16/09 - GAP;
WASHINGTON SQUAREMGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank -
•
•
•
1�u
k `
ii
•
c
, IH
07841 -10 THROUGH- PENETRATION-FIIZESTOP SYSTEMS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 07842 - FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire- resistive joint systems for the following:
1. Floor -to -floor joints.
2. Floor -to -wall joints.
3. Head -of -wall joints.
4. Wall -to -wall joints.
5. Joints between perimeter edge of fire- resistance -rated floor assemblies and back of non- fire - resistance-
rated, exterior, glazed aluminum curtain walls.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For joints in the following constructions, provide fire- resistive joint systems that are produced and
installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire- resistance rating of assembly in which fire- resistive joint systems are installed.
1. Fire - resistance -rated load- bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection -rated openings.
2. Fire - resistance -rated non -load- bearing walls, including partitions, with fire- protection -rated openings.
3. Fire - resistance -rated floor assemblies.
4. Exterior curtain -wall assemblies and fire- resistance -rated floor assemblies.
B. Fire Resistance of Joint Systems: Assembly ratings indicated, but with assembly ratings not less than that
equaling or exceeding fire- resistance rating of constructions in which joints are located, as determined by
UL 2079.
C. Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire - Containment Systems: Integrity and insulation ratings indicated as determined
by UBC Standard 26 -9 and UL 2079.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Fire Resistive Joint Schedule: Submit, for information only, a Fire Resistive Joint Schedule indicating the type of
fire resistive joint system to be installed for each joint. Indicate each kind of construction condition. Include fire
resistive joint design designation of Underwriter's Laboratories that evidences compliance with requirements for
each condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from Underwriter's Laboratories applicable to each fire
resistive joint system.
B. Shop Drawings: For each fire- resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are
installed and relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire- resistive joint system design designation of
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with
requirements for each condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is
applicable to each fire- resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.
C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From fire- resistive joint system manufacturer indicating the following:
1. Materials forming joint substrates have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with fill materials.
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of fire resistive joint system products certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
FIRE- RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -I
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. At Project Closeout, submit a list of systems installed, the UL design designation numbers, and the location of
each system. The submittal must have the Installer's signature.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fill Materials Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Use fire - resistive joint system manufacturer's standard test
methods to determine whether priming or other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid,
optimum adhesion of fill materials to joint substrates.
B. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that comply with "Performance
Requirements" Article, are identical to those tested by UL or another qualified testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and the following:
I . Fire - resistive joint systems are tested per UL 2079.
2. Perimeter fire- containment systems are identical to those tested per both UBC Standard 26 -9 and UL 2079.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Do not cover up fire- resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until
building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Basis -of- Design Product: The design for each fire- resistive joint system is based on the product named.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named products or comparable products by one
of the following:
a. Fire - Resistive Joint Systems:
1) A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2) Hilti, Inc.
3) Nelson Firestop Products.
4) RectorSeal Corporation (The).
5) Specified Technologies Inc.
6) 3M Fire Protection Products.
7) Tremco, Inc.
8) United States Gypsum Company.
b. Perimeter Fire - Containment Systems:
I) Specified Technologies Inc.
2) United States Gypsum Company.
2.2 FIRE- RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide fire- resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components of fire- resistive joint system, including forming materials, that are needed to
install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components
specified by fire- resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency
for systems indicated.
07842 -2 FIRE - RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Where ,UL- classified fire- resistive joint systems are indicated on the drawings, they refer to alphanumeric
designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHBN.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire- resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire- resistive
joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products•and applications indicated.
END OF SECTION 07842
•
FIRE- RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07842 -3
•
•
, . . .
01/.16/09 - • - GAP,' INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
07842-4 FIRE-RESISTIVE J6INT SYStEMS
. . • "_ . - -
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes sealants for the following applications:
1. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.
b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
c. Tile control and expansion joints.
d. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, and elevator
entrances.
e. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.
f. Butt joints between glass units.
g. Joints in structural silicone glazed curtain wall system.
h. Joints between different materials listed above.
i. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces:
a. Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.
b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.
c. Other joints as indicated.
B. Single Subcontract Responsibilities: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for
requirements applicable to single subcontract responsibility.
C. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each joint - sealant product indicated and the following:
1. Written certification from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their products comply with specification
requirements and are suitable for the use indicated as verified through manufacturers in -house testing
laboratory.
a. Complete instructions for handling, storage, mixing, priming, installation, curing and protection of each
type of sealant.
b. Manufacturer's letter, clearly indicating proposed lot numbers of each sealant to be supplied and their
expiration date sequence.
2. Laboratory and field test results confirming compatibility and /or adhesion for specific materials proposed for
application.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings, including full -size details of each condition.
C. Warranties: Submit specified warranties.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Exposed sealant work (sealants used for air and weatherseals which are external to curtain
wall systems at their perimeter, metal panel to panel joints, exterior stone cladding joints) shall be performed by a
single (i.e. one) firm specializing in the installation of sealants who has successfully produced work comparable to
this project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance for a period of 10 years. Concealed
sealant work (sealants which are internal to metal framed curtain wall systems, skylights, sloped glazing and
providing an air seal) shall be the responsibility of the subcontractor providing erection of the respective system.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant from a single manufacturer.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer,
product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for
multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer
or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).
2. When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint -Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less than those
allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.
C. Joint- Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of
interfering with adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint
sealant work which has failed to provide a weathertight system within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Special Manufacturer's Warranties: Written warranties (weatherseal and stain resistance), signed by elastomeric
sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that fail to provide
airtight and watertight joints, or fail in adhesion, cohesion, abrasion - resistance, stain - resistance, weather resistance,
or general durability or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in the manufacturer's data as
an inherent quality of the material within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
07920 -2 JOINT SEALANTS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and
with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as stated by sealant manufacturer's published data,
and as substantiated by the manufacturer for each application through testing.
B. Colors: For fully concealed joints, provide manufacturer's standard color of sealant which has the best overall
performance characteristics for the application shown. For exposed joints provide colors selected by Architect from
Manufacturer's full range.
C. Manufacturer's Representative: Do not use elastomeric sealant produced by any manufacturer who will not agree to
send a qualified technical representative to the project site when requested, for the purpose of rendering advice
concerning the proper installation of manufacturer's materials.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Use self leveling compounds for horizontal joints in pavements and non -sag compounds for all other areas
except as shown or specified.
B. Silicone Sealants (Non -Sag):
1. Typical Exterior Wall Joints (Two -part Silicone Sealants):
a. Properties:
1) Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, M, A and O.
2) Performance: Non - stain, non - bleed, non - streaking to sealed and adjacent substrates. The minimum pli
value after 7 day immersion shall not be less than 13 when tested in strict accordance with ASTM
C794 Adhesion in Peel.
3) Cure System and Oil Content: Neutral -Cure System specifically manufactured with controlled oil
content to eliminate oil migration into sealed substrates and residue rundown over and onto adjacent
substrates.
b. Available Product and Manufacturers:
1) 756 Silicone Building Sealant - HP with Additive; Dow Corning.
2) Tremco Dymeric.
3) Vulkem.
4) Mameco/Pecora 922.
2. Butt Glazing at Curtain Wall Vision Glass (One -part Silicone Sealants):
a. Weatherseal Bead:
1) Properties:
a) Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, G, and A.
b) Performance: Sealant shall be capable of being applied to surfaces having a surface temperature
range of -20 to +120 degrees F. ( -29 to +49 degrees C.). Cured sealant will not harden in cold, or
soften in heat, when exposed to a temperature range of -65 to +300 degrees F. ( -54 to +149
degrees C.).
c) Cure System: Neutral -Cure, medium modulus, System which is compatible with and adherent to
the two part insulating glass edge seals, glazing accessories and metal window frame materials
being provided for the project.
d) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2) Available Products:
a) Dow Corning Corporation; 795 Silicone Building Sealant.
b) Tremco; Spectrem 2.
3. Structural Glazing at Curtain Wall Spandrel Glass (One -part Silicone Sealants):
a. Weatherseal Bead:
1) Properties:
a) Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, G, and A.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
b) Performance: Sealant shall be capable of being applied to surfaces having a surface temperature
range of -20 to +120 degrees F. ( -29 to +49 degrees C.). Cured sealant will not harden in cold, or
soften in heat, when exposed to a temperature range of -65 to +300 degrees F. ( -54 to +149
degrees C.).
c) Cure System: Neutral -Cure, medium modulus, System which is compatible with and adherent to
the two part insulating glass edge seals, glazing accessories and metal window frame materials
being provided for the project.
d) Color: White.
2) Available Products:
a) Dow Corning Corporation; 795 Silicone Building Sealant.
b) Tremco; Spectrem 2.
b. Structural Bead:
1) Properties:
a) Standards: Comply with ASTM Cl 184 and ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT,
G, and A.
b) Performance: The minimum tensile adhesion strength shall be 120 psi with the sealant design
tensile and shear stress calculated at 20 psi resulting in a minimum 6 to 1 safety factor. Provide
laboratory testing and calculations indicating product working stress and safety factors, in addition
provide insulating glass manufacturers written concurrence, based on testing to actual job
production run samples of glass and framing materials, the product is proper for the uses shown
and specified. Sealant shall be capable of being applied to surfaces having a surface temperature
range of -15 to +140 degrees F. ( -26 to +60 degrees C.). Cured sealant will not harden in cold, or
soften in heat, when exposed to a temperature range of -40 to +300 degrees F. ( -40 to +149
degrees C.).
c) Cure System: Shelf storage stable, neutral -cure, medium modulus, system which is compatible and
adherent to the two part insulating glass edge seals, glazing accessories and metal window frame
materials being provided for the project.
d) Color: White.
2) Available Products:
a) Dow Corning Corporation; 995 Silicone Structural Adhesive.
b) Tremco; Proglaze SG.
C. Two Part Polyurethane Sealants (Non -Sag):
I. Typical Exterior Wall Joints (Two -part Polyurethane Sealants):
a. Properties:
1) Standards: Comply with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; use NT, M, A and O.
2) Performance: Non - stain, non - bleed, non - streaking to sealed and adjacent substrates. The minimum pli
value after 7 day immersion shall not be less than 13 when tested in strict accordance with ASTM
C794 Adhesion in Peel.
b. Products and Manufacturers: One of the following:
I) Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II.
2) Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic NP -2 TM
3) Tremco, an RPM Co.; Dymeric 240.
D. Two -Part Polyurethane Sealant (Self Leveling): ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25; use T; one of the
following:
1. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR -200.
2. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic SL 2 TM .
3. Tremco, an RPM Co.; THC 900.
E. Mildew- Resistant Silicone Sealant (use for joints at toilet fixtures, public toilet room countertops and vanities, and at
janitor closet mop receptor to wall transition): Complying with ASTM C920, Type S (single component), Grade NS
(non -sag), class 25, Use NT (non- traffic), Substrate uses G, A, and 0; and containing a fungicide for mildew
resistance.
1. Products: Provide one of the following available products:
07920 -4 JOINT SEALANTS
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 ,
a. Dow Corning; 786 Mildew Resistant Silicone Sealant.
b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS 1700.
c. Pecora Corporation; 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Sealant: Non- elastomeric, one part, non -sag, paintable latex sealant that is recommended for exposed
applications on the interior. Complying with ASTM C 834:
1. Products: Provide one of the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 + Silicone
b. Sonneborn Building Products Div., ChemRex, Inc.; Sonolastic Sonolac. -
c. Tremco, an RPM Co.; Tremflex 834.
2.4 JOINT- SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, •
sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based
on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: One of the following preformed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing,
nonextruding backings of flexible plastic foam complying with ASTM C 1330, and of type indicated below. Select •
shape and density of cylindrical sealant backings in consultation with the manufacturer for proper performance in
specific condition of use in each case. •
1. Type C: Closed -cell polyethylene foam material with a surface skin, which is nonabsorbent to liquid water and
gas, non - outgassing in unruptured state; one of the following:
•
a. HBR Closed Cell Backer Rod; Nomaco, Inc._
b. Sonneborn Sonolastic Closed -Cell Backer -Rod; ChemRex, Inc.
• 2. Type B: Bi- cellular reticulated, polymeric foam material with a surface skin, nonoutgassing, with a density of
between 24-48 kg /cubic meter .per ASTM D1622 and minimum, tensile strength of greater than 200 kPa per
ASTM D1623, and with.water absorption less than 0.10 gm/cc per ASTM C1016; one of the following:
a. SofRod; Nomaco, Inc.
b. Sonolastic Soft Backer -Rod; ChemRex, Inc.
C. Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene, '11 fluorocarbon, or other plastic •tape recommended by sealant manufacturer
for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint - filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where •
such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable.
D. Weep and Vent Tubes: Clear plastic (PVC) tubing, minimum 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) inside diameter, and of length as
required to extend between exterior face of sealant and open cavity behind. _
I. At window and curtain wall systems, where required by system designer, provide gutter termination of tube
with preformed.nipples suitable for sealing to gutter.
E. Cork Joint Filler: Resilient and nonextruding, ASTM D1752, Type II.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended, as•verified through compatibility and adhesion testing, by joint sealant manufacturer •
for the substrates indicated to be sealed.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing •
materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent •
nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and which will not stain nor mar
the finish of surfaces adjacent to joints to which it is applied. •
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -5
• -t
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint
configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint - sealant performance. Proceed with
installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Silicone Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing ".
B. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant
manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:
1. Remove foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust,
paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by
sealant manufacturer), existing joint sealants, existing backer rods, existing waterproofing materials, existing
water repellent treatments, oil, grease, water, surface dirt, and frost.
2. Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of tile, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing,
grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from
above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air.
3. Remove laitance and form - release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical
cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion
of joint sealants.
C. Joint Priming (Elastomeric Sealants Only): Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant
manufacturer, based on prior testing and experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's
written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint- sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
D. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove
sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications
indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Silicone Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for installation.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1 193 for use of joint sealants as
applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
1. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to
produce cross - sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability.
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Trim for tight fit around obstructions or elements
penetrating the joint.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.
c. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with
dry sealant backings.
2. Install bond - breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of
07920 -6 JOINT SEALANTS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
joints.
3. Install weeps and vents into joints at the same time sealants are being installed. Unless otherwise shown on the
drawings, or directed by the Architect, locate weeps and vents spaced as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer and the window and curtain wall fabricator and erector. Do not install weeps and vents at outside
building corners. Do not install vents at horizontal joints immediately below shelf angles, sills, and through
wall flashings.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully
wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
cross - sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install
sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
1. Apply sealants in the depth shown or, if none is shown, apply in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and the following general proportions and limitations:
a. Apply elastomeric sealants in sidewalk, pavement and similar horizontal joints to a depth equal to 75% of
the joint width, but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm) and not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm).
b. Apply elastomeric sealants, in joints not subject to traffic or other abrasion, to a depth equal to 50% of the
joint width, but not less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) and not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm).
c. Apply non - elastomeric sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.
2. Pour self leveling sealants to a depth approximately equal to the joint width.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform, beads to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with
sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor
sealants or adjacent surfaces. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to the profile shown, or if none is shown, tool
slightly concave.
1. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints.
2. Provide a slight wash on horizontal joints where horizontal and vertical surfaces meet.
3. Against rough surfaces or in joints of uneven widths avoid the appearance of excess sealant or compound by
locating the compound or sealant well back into joint wherever possible.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field- Adhesion Testing: Field -test exterior structural glazing sealant adhesion to glass and adjacent substrates as
follows:
1. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each type of exposed exterior wall sealant and
joint substrate.
2. Perform one test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.
B. Field adhesion testing of sealants shall take place with the sealant manufacturers representative present.
1. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand -pull method described below:
a. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 3 inches (75 mm)
long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch (25 mm) from cross -cut end of
3 -inch (75 -mm) piece.
b. Use fingers to grasp 3 -inch (75 -mm) piece of sealant between cross -cut end and 1 -inch (25 -mm) mark; pull
firmly at a 90- degree angle to the joint in the direction of side cuts and hold the sealant in this position for
10 seconds; following the 10 second time duration pull sealant at a 180 degree angle parallel to the joint
and hold the sealant in this position for 10 seconds. Pull sealant away from joint to the distance
recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesion.
c. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately. Do this by extending cut
along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
2. Record test results, and observations of joint and sealant conditions, in a field adhesion test log.
3. Repair joint sealants pulled from test area as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
JOINT SEALANTS 07920 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to
adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test
results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning
materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original
work.
END OF SECTION 07920
07920 -8 JOINT SEALANTS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes steel doors and frames.
1. When the integration of a security system into the steel door and frame is required, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the total and complete coordination of the security system components into the Work.
B. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for stile and rail wood doors installed in steel frames.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping.
4. Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass in doors and frames.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting for field painting factory primed doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each product indicated. Include material descriptions, core descriptions,
label compliance, sound and fire- resistance ratings, and finishes for each type of door and frame specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit door and frame schedule using same reference designations indicated on Drawings.
Include opening size(s), handing of doors, frame throat dimensions, details of each frame type, elevations of door
design types, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door hardware and reinforcements,
hardware group numbers, details of joints and connections, fire label requirements including fire rating time
duration, maximum temperature rise requirements, and smoke label requirements.
I. Indicate routing of electrical conduit and dimensions and locations of cutouts in doors and frames to accept
electric hardware devices.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following
publications by Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Div. of National Association of Architectural
Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM), unless more stringent requirements are indicated in the Contract Documents:
1. HMMA "Hollow Metal Manual ".
2. HMMA 861 "Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ".
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing steel doors and frames similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to
produce required units.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire- protection ratings indicated, based on testing
according to NFPA 252; and 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2 "Fire Test of Door Assemblies" and 1997 UBC Standard 7 -4
"Fire Test of Window Assemblies ", or 2006 IBC and UL IOC "Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies ". Fire classification labels at all doors with fire ratings greater than 20 minutes shall indicate the
temperature rise developed on the unexposed surface of the door after the first 30 minutes of fire exposure.
1. See Drawings for applicable code conformance.
2. Temperature -Rise Rating: Where indicated, provide doors that have a temperature -rise rating of 450 deg F (250
deg C) maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure.
3. Provide fire rated door assemblies in compliance with 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2, Part 1 for positive pressure, or
2006 IBC for positive pressure. Sizes and configurations as shown on the drawings. Installed door assemblies
shall be in accordance with door manufacturers certified assemblies.
a. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall be established at 40
inches (1000 mm) or Tess above the sill.
4. Provide fire rated door assemblies with smoke and draft control rating in compliance with 1997 UBC Standard
7 -2 Part 2, or 2006 IBC and UL 1784, at corridors, stairwells, and where required by applicable codes. Sizes
and configurations as shown on the drawings. Installed door assemblies shall be in accordance with door
manufacturers certified assemblies.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames palleted, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project site storage.
B. Inspect doors and frames, on delivery, for damage. Tool marks, rust, blemishes, and any other damage on exposed
surfaces will not be acceptable. Remove and replace damaged items as directed by Architect. Store doors and
frames at building site in a dry location, off the ground, and in such a manner as to prevent deterioration.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide doors and frames by one of the following:
1. Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Ceco Door Products.
c. Curries Company.
d. Door Components, Inc.
e. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll -Rand.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, CS (commercial steel), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface
defects; pickled and oiled. Not less than 16 gage thick where frames are indicated to be built into exterior walls, hot
dip galvanize after fabrication in compliance with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.
08110-2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
B. Cold- Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, CS (commercial steel), and ASTM A 568/A 568M, free from
scale, pitting, coil breaks, or other defects, exposed (matte) dull finish.
C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Galvanized or cadmium plated steel.
1. Expansion Bolts and Shields: FS FF -S -325, Group III, Type 1 or 2.
2. Machine Screws: FS FF -S -92, carbon steel, Type III cross recessed, design I or II recess, style 2C flat head.
D. Filler: Sound deadening and heat retarding mineral fiber insulating material.
2.3 DOORS
A. General: Provide flush - design doors, 1 -3/4 inches (44 mm) thick, of seamless hollow construction, unless otherwise
indicated. Construct doors with sheets joined at their vertical edges by continuous welding the full height of the
door, with no visible seams on their faces or vertical edges, and all welds ground and finished flush.
1. Visible seams at vertical door edges are permitted at doors not adjacent to sales area.
2. For single- acting swing doors, bevel both vertical edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3 mm in 50 mm).
B. Core Construction: Provide one of the following core constructions welded to both door faces:
1. Honeycomb Core: Resin - impregnated kraft paper with maximum 1 -inch (25.4 -mm) cells and minimum 42 -psi
(290 -kPa) crushing strength.
2. Steel- Stiffened Core: 20 gage steel vertical stiffeners extending full -door height, spaced not more than 6 inches
(150 mm) apart and spot welded to face sheets a maximum of 5 inches (127 mm) o.c. Place filler between
stiffeners for full height of door.
C. Fire Door Cores: A continuous mineral fiberboard core permanently bonded to the inside face of the outer face
sheet unless otherwise required to provide fire- protection and temperature -rise ratings indicated.
D. Top and Bottom Channels: Spot weld metal channel not less than thickness of face sheet to face sheets not more
than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
1. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted horizontal channels of same material as face sheet so flanges
of channels are even with bottom and top edges of face sheets.
E. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcing from the same material as door to comply with the following.
Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with door surfaces.
1. Hinges and Pivots: 7 gage, 1 -1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 9 inches (229 mm).
2. Closer Reinforcements: 12 gage, one piece channel by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
3. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
4. In lieu of reinforcement specified, hardware manufacturers recommended reinforcing units may be used.
5. Exit Device Reinforcements: 0.250 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 10 inches (245 mm) high by 4 inches (101 mm)
wide centered on exit device case body, unless otherwise recommended by exit device manufacturer.
F. Interior Steel Doors:
1. Typical Interior Doors: Flush design with 18 gage cold - rolled stretcher - leveled steel face sheets and other metal
components from hot- or cold - rolled steel sheets.
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.4 FRAMES
A. Fabricate steel door frames, formed to profiles indicated, with full 5/8 inch (16 mm) stops, and of the following
minimum thicknesses.
1. For interior use, form frames from cold- rolled steel sheet of the following thicknesses:
a. Openings up to and Including 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 16 gage.
b. Openings More Than 48 Inches (1200 mm) Wide: 14 gage.
B. Provide frames either saw mitered and full (continuously) welded, or machine mitered and full welded, on back side
at frame corners and stops with edges straight and true. Grind welds smooth and flush on exposed surfaces.
C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate reinforcements from same material as frame to comply with the following.
Offset reinforcement so that faces of mortised hardware items are flush with surface of the frame.
1. Hinges and Pivots: 7 gage, 1 -1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm).
2. Strike, and Surface Mounted Hold Open Arms Reinforcements: 12 gage, size as required by hardware
manufacturer.
3. Closer Reinforcements: 12 gage, one piece channel by size as required by hardware manufacturer.
4. Other Hardware Reinforcements: As required for adequate strength and anchorage.
D. Jamb Anchors: Locate jamb anchors above hinges and directly opposite on strike jamb as required to secure frames
to adjacent construction. At metal stud partitions locate the additional jamb anchor below the top hinge.
1. Metal -Stud Partitions: Metal channel stud zee anchor sized to match stud width, welded to back of frames,
formed of same material and gauge thickness as frame. Provide at least the number of anchors for each jamb
according to the following heights:
a. Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1500 mm) in height.
b. Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1500 to 2250 mm) in height.
c. Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2250 to 2400 mm) in height.
d. One additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (600 mm) or fraction thereof more than 96 inches (2400
mm) in height.
E. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, formed of same material as
frame, 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick, and punched with two holes to receive two (2) 0.375 inch (9.5 mm) fasteners.
Where floor fill or setting beds occur support frame by adjustable floor anchors bolted to the structural substrate.
Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.
F. Head Reinforcement: For frames more than 48 inches (1200 mm) wide in masonry wall openings, provide
continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, 0.093 inch (2.3 mm) thick for full width of opening, welded to back of
frame at head. Head reinforcements shall not be used as a lintel or load bearing member for masonry.
G. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions to
serve as bracing during shipment and handling and to hold frames in proper position until anchorage and adjacent
construction have been completed.
H. Door Silencer Holes: Drill strike jamb stop to receive three silencers on single door frames and for two silencers on
double door frames. Insert plastic plugs in holes to keep holes clear during installation.
I. Plaster Guards and Removable Access Plates: Provide 0.016 -inch- (0.4 -mm -) thick plaster guards or dust -cover
boxes of same material as frame, welded to frame at back of hardware cutouts to close off interior of openings and
prevent mortar or other materials from obstructing hardware operation. Provide removable access plates in the
heads of frames to receive overhead concealed door closers.
08110-4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2.5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Provide continuous stops and moldings around solid, glazed, and louvered panels where indicated.
B. Form fixed stops and moldings integral with frame, on the exterior (non- secured) side of the frame.
C. Provide removable stops and moldings formed of 0.032 -inch- (0.8 -mm -) thick steel sheets matching steel frames.
Secure with countersunk oval head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. Form
corners with butted hairline joints.
D. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of installation
indicated.
2.6 KNOCKDOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Provide combination type knockdown hollow metal door frames to be used as both door buck and trim, formed to
profiles shown, of minimum 0.053 inches (1.3 mm) thick cold rolled steel.
1. Frames shall be splined, tabbed, and miter fit, knockdown type compatible with adjacent construction
conditions.
2. Accurately machine, file, and fit exposed connections with hairline joints.
3. Typical Anchorage: Frames shall be provided with concealed mechanical compression anchors at top of each
jamb and each jamb shall be prepared and provided with provision for anchorage at floor line of jamb return
face.
4. Miter and anchorage type subject to acceptance of Architect.
B. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames for mortise type hardware. Provide internal reinforcement for surface type
hardware which is to be field drilled and tapped per requirements hereinbefore specified for welded frames and
including silencers. Locate hardware in frames to match location specified and in accordance with the hardware
schedule and templates.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat in appearance, and free of defects, warp, wave, and buckle. Accurately form
metal to sizes and profiles indicated. Accurately machine, file, and fit exposed connections with hairline joints.
Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.
B. Exposed Fasteners: Provide countersunk flat heads for exposed screws and bolts, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware, including cutouts, reinforcement, mortising,
drilling, and tapping, according to final hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Secure
reinforcement by spot welding. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Al 15 Series specifications for door
and frame preparation for hardware. Factory reinforce doors and frames to receive surface - applied hardware.
Factory drill and tap for surface - applied hardware, except at pushplates and kickplates provide reinforcing only.
1. Locate hardware as indicated on the drawings or in Division 8 Section `Door Hardware' or, if not indicated,
according to HMMA 831, "Recommended Hardware Locations for Custom Hollow Metal Doors and Frames."
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. General: Clean, treat and prime surfaces of fabricated steel door and frame work, inside and out, whether exposed
or concealed in the construction.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC -SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning "; remove dirt, oil, grease, or
other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale, shavings, filings, and rust, if present,
complying with SSPC -SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning,"
C. Factory Priming for Field- Painted Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Apply a sufficient number of coats, baked on, to obtain uniformly smooth exposed surfaces. Touch
up surfaces having runs, smears, or bare spots.
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fast - curing, corrosion- inhibiting, lead- and chromate -free,
universal primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; compatible with substrate and field -
applied finish paint system indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install doors and frames according to DHI A1 15.1G, the Architect reviewed shop drawings, and
manufacturer's written recommendations and installation instructions.
B. Frames: Install frames where indicated. Extend frame anchorages below fills and finishes. Coordinate the
installation of built -in anchors for wall and partition construction as required with other work.
1. Knock -Down Frames: Install knock -down frames in locations shown, in perfect alignment and elevation,
plumb, level, straight and true, and free from rack.
2. At fire -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
3. Non -Fire Rated Doors: Fit non -fire -rated doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following
clearances:
a. Jambs and Head: 3/32 inch (2 mm).
b. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3 mm).
c. Bottom: 3/8 inch (9 mm), if no threshold or carpet.
d. Bottom: 1/8 inch (3 mm), at threshold or carpet.
4. Fire -Rated Doors: Install with clearances as specified in NFPA 80.
5. Smoke Control Doors: Install according to NFPA 105.
C. Wood Door Installation: Refer to Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors ".
D. Apply hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Division 8 Section `Door Hardware'.
Drill and tap for machine screws as required. Do not use self tapping sheet metal screws. Adjust door installation to
provide uniform clearance at head and jambs, and to contact stops uniformly. Adjust hardware items just prior to
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
08110-6 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items just before final inspection. Leave work in
complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are
warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply
touchup of compatible air - drying primer.
1. Finish Painting: Refer to Division 9 Section "Interior Painting ".
C. Remove and replace defective work, including doors or frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise defective.
D. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that steel doors
and frames will be without any damage or deterioration, at time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 -7
01/16/09 - GAP-;,INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR = STORE #2805 206805
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
•
•
08110-8 STEELD'ockSW■Ifi':FRAMES
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - 'GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes solid core flush wood doors.
1. When the integration of a security system into the door and frame work is required, the Contractor shall be
responsible for the total and complete coordination of the security system components into the Work.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work
C. Related sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood doors installed in wood frames .
2. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for wood doors installed in steel frames.
3. Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for stile and rail wood doors.
4. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware and weather stripping.
5. Division 9 Section "Painting for field painting factory primed doors and frames.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of door required, including details, of core and edge construction,
louvers, and trim for openings., Include factory - finishing specifications. •
1. Include factory finishing, sealing or priming product data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location, size, thickness, and hand of each door; elevation of each
kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; undercuts,
special beveling, and other pertinent data.
1. Indicate dimensions and-locations of mortises and holes for hardware of factory machined doors.
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
3. Indicate routing of electrical conduit and dimensions and locations of cutouts in wood doors to accept electric -
hardware devices.
C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from•a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, 7 Edition, Version 1.0, Section 1300" where standards and specifications
conflict the more stringent shall be required.
-i
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1
_ -1
'•7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood doors during transit, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. Store wood
doors on a flat level surface in a dry, well ventilated, place. Keep wood doors a minimum of 3 -1/2" off floor surface
and protected by a protective covering under the bottom door and over the top door. Covering should protect wood
doors from dirt, water and abuse but allow for air circulation under and around the stack. Do not store wood doors
in direct sunlight. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Package doors individually in heavy duty cardboard cartons prior to shipment from factory. Mark each door on top
and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings using temporary, removable, or concealed markings.
C. Handle wood doors with clean gloves. Lift and carry wood doors when moving them around the site, do not drag
wood doors across one another.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work, such as masonry,
concrete, stone, tile, terrazzo, plastering, wallboard joint treatment, is complete and dried, and HVAC system is
operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the
construction period. Do not expose doors to sudden changes in temperature such as forced heat used to dry out the
site.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship for the life of the
original installation of the door. A representative of the door manufacturer shall inspect the installed doors and shall
note on the warranty that no provisions of the warranty have been nullified in the manufacture and/or installation.
1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion:
a. Interior Doors: Life of installation.
2. Warranty shall include repair or replacement of doors that have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) in a 42 -by -84 -inch (1067 -by- 2134 -mm) section.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flush Wood Door Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flush wood door products by
one of the following:
1. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
2. Vancouver Door Co., Inc.
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. Grade: Custom.
2. Faces for Interior a Doors: Standard thickness, thoroughly dried, medium - density overlay (MDO).
3. Thickness: 1 -3/4 inch (45 -mm) unless otherwise indicated.
4. Apply medium - density overlay to standard thickness, closed - grain, hardwood face veneers or directly to high -
08211-2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
density hardboard crossbands.
2.3 SOLID -CORE DOORS
A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements:
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade 1 -LD -2.
a. Provide doors with either glued -block or structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at
locations where exit devices are indicated.
b. Provide structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for full -light doors with glass or
raised -panel inserts.
2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through - bolting hardware,
as follows:
a. 5 -inch (125 -mm) top -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers.
b. 5 -inch (125 -mm) bottom -rail blocking, in doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates.
3. Vertical Edges: 1 -3/8 inch wide minimum prior to fitting, 2 ply laminated wood construction consisting of a
single piece hardwood outer band, without fingerjoints, and an inner band of mill option hardwood. Outer band
to match face veneer for transparent finished veneered -faced doors.
4. Crossbanding: Minimum 1/16 inch thick, low density hardwood, composite, or high density hardboard.
B. Hardboard -Faced Door Construction for Opaque Finish: AWI Section 1300, PC -5 CE.
1. Core: Particleboard, except as otherwise noted.
2. Construction: Three plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces are
applied.
3. Crossbanding materials shall extend full width of door with grain running horizontally, tapeless spliced without
voids or show through (telegraphing), and directly glued to core and blocking.
4. Sand cross banding before application of facing.
5. Facing shall extend full height of door with grain running vertically, tapeless spliced without voids or show
through (telegraphing), and directly glued to cross band.
6. Glue lines between facing, crossbanding, and blocking shall be of a type to comply with the specified warranty
using the hot plate process.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame - opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless
otherwise indicated: Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI - WDHS -3.
Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, AWI Section 1300 -G -20, DHI Al 15 -W series
standards, and hardware templates.
1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before
factory machining.
2. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced
standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. Install light and louver beads with fasteners spaced for opening size
indicated. Install wood bead moldings with finish nails and countersink without striking bead. Fill countersunk
heads with putty matching wood bead color.
2.5 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish:
1. Shop prime faces and edges of doors, including cutouts, with one coat of wood primer /sealer as standard with
door manufacturer. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before priming. Apply primer /sealer uniformly without
bare spots, runs, or sags.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and
have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Hardware:
1. Apply hardware to doors in accordance with hardware manufacturer's instructions and Division 8 Section
"Door Hardware." For particleboard core doors drill pilot holes of proper size for installing hinge screws.
Adjust hardware items just prior to final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition.
2. Factory wrapping shall be maintained on new doors during construction period, and all hardware shall be
installed by cutting the factory wrapping at the mounting location of the hardware item.
B. General Door Installation Standards:
1. Install doors in locations indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality
standard, and as indicated. Where standards conflict the more stringent shall apply.
C. Factory- Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge, matching clearances specified for factory
prefitting, and to contact stops uniformly. Field cutting, fitting or trimming, if required, shall be executed in a
workmanlike manner.
D. Field - Finished Doors:
1. Touch up shop primer on all doors.
2. Refer to the following for finishing requirements: Division 9 Section "Painting."
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
A. Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
B. Protection:
1. Protect wood doors to ensure that the wood door work will be without damage or deterioration at the time of
Substantial Completion.
2. Refinish or replace wood doors damaged during installation. Replace any new wood doors that are warped,
twisted, demonstrate core show through, are not true in plane, or cannot be refinished to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
END OF SECTION 08211
08211 -4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08212 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior stile and rail wood doors.
B. See Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood door frames.
C. See Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for full -light entrance doors.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of door.
1. Include factory finishing, sealing or priming specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details
not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.
C. Samples: For each species and finish required.
D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of stile and rail wood door through one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Quality Standard for Doors of Special Design and Construction: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards."
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, and have warped
(bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42 -by -84 -inch (1067 -by- 2134 -mm) section.
1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion:
a. Interior Doors: Life of installation.
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced quality standards unless more stringent requirements are
specified.
1. Assemble interior doors, frames, and sidelites, including components, with either dry-use or wet -use
adhesives complying with ASTM D 5572 for finger joints and ASTM D 5751 for joints other than finger
joints.
B. Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea - formaldehyde resins.
2.2 STILE AND RAIL DOORS OF SPECIAL DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Construction, General:
1. Grade of Doors for Opaque Finish: Custom.
B. Door Construction for Opaque Finish:
1. Stile and Rail Construction: One of the following.
a. Clear softwood; may be edge glued for width and finger jointed.
b. Veneered, structural composite lumber or edge - glued, finger- jointed lumber.
2. Flat -Panel Construction: Medium - density fiberboard or strawboard.
C. Interior Doors:
I. Flat -Panel Thickness: As indicated.
D. Available Manufacturers for Interior Doors:
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division.
3. ENJO Architectural Millwork.
4. Karona, Inc.
5. Maiman Company (The).
6. Oakwood Woodworks.
7. Pinecrest, Inc.
8. Select Interior Door, Ltd.
9. SUN- DOR -CO.
10. Woodtech Trading Company.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame - opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality
standard for fitting.
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
2.4 SHOP PRIMING
A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop apply one coat of wood primer specified in Division 9 Section "Painting" to faces
and edges of doors.
08212 -2 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS
=
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
=- • 20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with referenced quality standard, and as
indicated.
B. Factory- Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
C. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."
D. Touch up shop primer on nrall doors.
•
END OF SECTION 08212
•
STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 08212 -3
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUAREIfIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08311 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Access doors and frames.
2. Fire -rated access doors and frames.
B. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for mortise or rim cylinder locks and master keying.
C. See division 9 section "Gypsum Board Systems" for GFRG access panels.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS,
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction per test method indicated.
1. Vertical Access Doors: NFPA 252 or UL 10B.
2. Horizontal Access Doors and Frames: ASTM E 119, UBC Standard 7.1, or UL 263.
B. Size and Location Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to
concealed equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
1. Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel: Coat to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for steel and iron products and
ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware.
B. Steel Sheet:
1. Cold - Rolled: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel
(DS), Type B; stretcher- leveled standard of flatness.
C. Paint:
1. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast- curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer
complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P -664; selected for good resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound
foundation for field- applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by Nystrom, Inc.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim:
1. Product: Nystrom, Inc.; NT series.
2. Material: Prime- painted steel sheet.
3. Surface Type: Ceramic tile and FRP.
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
4. Locations: Walls.
5. Door: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame.
6. Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (I.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal with 1 -inch- (25 -mm -) wide, surface- mounted
trim.
7. Hinges: Spring- loaded concealed pin type.
8. Lock: Key- operated cylinder lock.
B. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames for Drywall:
1. Product: Nystrom, Inc.; NW series.
2. Material: Prime - painted steel sheet.
3. Surface Type: Gypsum board, veneer plaster, or plaster, as indicated in Drawings.
4. Locations: Walls and ceilings.
5. Door: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces.
6. Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
7. Hinges: Spring - loaded concealed pin type.
8. Lock: Key- operated cylinder lock.
C. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames for Plaster:
1. Product: Nystrom, Inc.; NP series.
2. Material: Prime - painted steel sheet.
3. Surface Type: Veneer plaster, or plaster, as indicated in Drawings.
4. Locations: Walls and ceilings.
5. Door: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces.
6. Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal with plaster bead.
7. Hinges: Spring- loaded concealed pin type.
8. Lock: Key- operated cylinder lock.
D. Flush, Insulated, Fire -Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames for Drywall:
1. Product: Nystrom, Inc.; IW series.
2. Material: Prime - painted steel sheet.
3. Surface Type: Gypsum board.
4. Locations: Walls and ceilings.
5. Fire - Resistance Rating: 1 hour.
6. Temperature -Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.
7. Door: Flush panel with core of mineral -fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness
of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm).
8. Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal with drywall bead.
9. Hinges: Concealed pin type.
10. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
11. Lock: Key- operated mortise lock with interior release.
E. Flush, Insulated, Fire -Rated Access Doors and Trimless Frames for Plaster:
1. Product: Nystrom, Inc.; IP series.
2. Material: Prime - painted steel sheet.
3. Surface Type: Gypsum board, veneer plaster, or plaster, as indicated in Drawings.
4. Locations: Walls and ceilings.
5. Fire - Resistance Rating: 1 hour.
6. Temperature -Rise Rating: 250 deg F (139 deg C) at the end of 30 minutes.
7. Door: Flush panel with core of mineral -fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness
of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm).
8. Frame: Minimum 0.060 -inch- (1.5 -mm -) thick sheet metal with plaster bead.
9. Hinges: Concealed pin type.
10. Automatic Closer: Spring type.
11. Lock: Key- operated mortise lock with interior release.
08311 -2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
•
GAP, INC. " 01/16/09
• 20080538 • WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Latching Mechanisms: - Furnish number required to hold doors.in flush;,smooth plane when closed.
1. For cylinder or mortise lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all .locks alike.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
• 3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Advise installers of other work•,about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation,
• including ,sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and
anchoring devices.
•
B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent •
Y• finish surfaces. •
C. Install access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.
D. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.
•
END OF SECTION 08311 •
•
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08311 -3
•
•
01/16/09 - - - • °
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538 .
Page left intentio blank .
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
c
08311 -4 ACCESS - DOORS ANDFFR'AI 4ES
�,ti. �� . - U:G9� V x t , .J•.. �i4+'.. t _ - �_ r ..1.. _ _ "F J n:°.- -. •
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08450 - ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes all -glass entrance systems. The all glass entrance work includes the following as shown in •
Drawings:
1. Metal trim, flashings, and similar items in conjunction with all glass entrances.
2. Sealants, joint fillers, and gasketing systems for entrances.
3. Anchors, shims, fasteners, inserts, expansion devices, accessories, support brackets and attachments for all glass
entrances.
4. Glass and glazing for all glass entrance doors and transoms.
5. Glass door fittings and hardware.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work
C. RELATED SECTIONS: Division 8 Section "Glass and Glazing."
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide all glass entrance systems meeting or exceeding the following performance requirements:
1. Structural Properties:
a. Wind Loads: .
1) At exterior locations the all glass entrance work, including glass, shall be designed, fabricated and
installed to withstand the maximum inward and outward wind pressures as required by codes indicated
on Drawings.
2) At interior locations the all glass entrance work, including. glass, shall be designed, fabricated and
installed to withstand a maximum inward and outward wind pressure of 5 lbf /sq. ft.
b. Seismic Loads: As required by codes indicated on Drawings. ,
c. Deflection Limitations:
1) Deflections: Base calculations for the following deflections upon the combination of maximum direct
wind loads, building deflections, thermal stresses, and erection tolerances.
a) The deflection of any framing member in a direction normal to the plane of the wall when
subjected to- 'the full code required wind loads specified above shall not exceed 1/175 of its clear
span or 3/4 inch (19 mm) whichever is less, except limit deflection of glass to 1 inch (25.4 mm).
b) Glass, sealants and interior finishes shall not be included to contribute to framing member
strength, stiffness or lateral stability.
d. Dead Loads:
1) Limit deflections of metal members spanning door openings to 1/300. The clearance between the
member and an operable door shall be no less than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
2) Twisting (rotation) of the horizontals due to the weight of the glass shall not exceed 1 degree, -
measured,between ends and center of each span.
e. Uniform Structural- Loads: Satisfactory uniform wind loading tests of each all glass entrance and storefront
assembly (each swinging and sliding door) shall have been conducted in accordance with the requirements
of ASTM Each assembly shall have been subjected to inward and outward acting uniform loads
equal to 1.5 times th'e inward and outward acting design wind loads specified above under paragraph 'wind
f it = loads'. Satisfactory-performance at these loads shall mean no glass or other component breakage, and no
ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES 08450 -1
. ,.�
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
component disengagement.
B. Building Frame Movement: Design, fabricate and install all glass entrances and storefronts to withstand building
movements including thermal movements, loading deflections, shrinkage, creep and similar movements. Thermal
movements shall be as specified above. Building frame deflections, shrinkage, creep and other movements are
available from the structural engineer.
C. Glass Statistical Factor: Glass thicknesses when shown on the drawings, or specified, are for convenience of
detailing only and are to be confirmed by the Contractor and /or glass manufacturer. All glass for the size openings
shown will be provided in thicknesses such that the probability of breakage at the design "Wind Load" will not
exceed 8 lights per 1000 lights (S.F. 2.5) based on a 60 second uniform wind load duration, and reflectance and
shading indicated. The glass manufacturer shall provide, on request, substantiating glass breakage data if such data
is not otherwise available as manufacturer's published data.
D. Design Modifications:
1. Submit design modifications necessary to meet the performance requirements and field coordination.
2. Variations in details or materials shall not adversely affect the appearance, durability or strength of components.
3. Maintain the general design concept without altering size of members, profiles and alignment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each all glass entrance and
storefront product specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing scaled elevations, plans, and sections of the all glass entrance and
storefront work. Full scale sections shall be prepared and submitted for details of the assemblies that cannot be
shown in the elevations or sections. Include with shop drawings metal thickness of all metal components, glass
thicknesses, metal finishes, details of fittings, and all other pertinent information as necessary or requested by the
Architect to indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. Details of field connections, anchorage, and their
relationship to the work of others shall be clearly indicated for the coordination of the work by other building trades.
Details of fastening and sealing methods and product joinery shall be shown to ensure proper performance of the
field installation. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been approved by Architect
for fabrication.
1. Show direction of satin finish for each component receiving a directional finish.
C. Structural Calculations: Submit, for information only, copies of structural calculations indicating complete
compliance with the specified performance requirements. Calculations shall be prepared, signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer registered in the state wherein the work is to be erected.
D. Field Test Reports: Submit field testing reports.
E. Product Test Reports: Submit certified product test reports based on tests performed by an AAMA Accredited
Laboratory clearly describing in written form, and in shop drawing form, compliance of each all glass entrance and
storefront assembly (each swinging and sliding door) with requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing.
F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit copies of manufacturer's written instructions for adjustment, operation and
maintenance of swinging and sliding doors.
G. Installation Instructions: Installation instructions for glass entrance system components shall be available at jobsite
during construction and at completion of work for Architect's reference.
H. Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit test results.
08450 -2 ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: The all glass entrance drawings and specifications are based on the Oldcastle Glass
Type "P" Doors and Components as described in Part 2 of this Section.
B. Installer Qualifications: Subcontract the all glass entrance work to a firm which is specialized in the erection of all
glass entrances and storefronts and who has successfully produced work similar in design and extent to that required
for the project, in not less than three projects of similar scope to the satisfaction of the Architect, and whose work
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service performance for a period of 10 years.
C. Testing laboratories shall be specifically qualified to conduct laboratory and field performance tests required by
these specifications and acceptable to the Architect.
D. Preconstruction Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Test results confirming compatibility and adhesion are
mandatory for all concealed and exposed sealant materials in contact with exterior glazing, stone, precast, other
sealants, flashings, metal framing, and shims prior to full size sample installation construction. Refer to Division 7
Section "Joint Sealants" for specific testing requirements, and anticipated lead time necessary to perform testing.
E. Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards below, where
standards conflict the more stringent shall apply:
1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
a. AAMA "Aluminum Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual," Volumes 1 -9.
b. AAMA "Aluminum Store Front and Entrance Design Guide Manual."
c. AAMA 611 "Anodized Architectural Aluminum."
d. AAMA 2603 "Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings
on Extruded Aluminum."
e. AAMA 2605 "Specification for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and
Panels ".
2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), "Steel Construction Manual," Current Edition.
3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. 2, Systems and
Specifications ".
4. Federal Standard 16 CFR 1201, Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): "Safety Standard for
Architectural Glazing Materials," as published in the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR). Comply with the
applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal and Municipal authorities
having jurisdiction, wherever requirements conflict the more stringent shall be required. Obtain approvals from
all such authorities. As a minimum provide safety glazing complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing
requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.
5. Welding Standards: Welding shall be performed by skilled and qualified mechanics. Welding shall be
performed in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS DI .1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and
AWS DI.2, "Structural Welding Code -- Aluminum."
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section
"Project Meetings." Prior to the start of the all glass entrance and storefront work, and at the Contractor's direction,
meet at the site and review the installation procedures and coordination with other work. Meeting shall include
Contractor, Owner, all glass entrance and storefront installer, sealant installer, as well as any other subcontractors or
material technical service representatives whose work, or products, must be coordinated with the all glass entrance
and storefront work.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with the applicable provisions of AAMA "Curtain Wall Manual #10" for the care and handling of
all glass entrance and storefront work from shop to site.
B. Packaging of components shall be so selected to protect the components from damage during shipping and handling.
ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES 08450 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. Storage on Site:
1. Store all glass entrance and storefront components in a location and in a manner to avoid damage to the
components. Stacking shall be done in a way which will prevent bending, excessive pressure, abrasion or other
permanent damage of the component and its finished surfaces.
2. Store all glass entrance and storefront components and materials in a clean, dry location, away from uncured
concrete and other construction activities. Cover with non - staining waterproof paper, tarpaulin, or polyethylene
sheeting in a manner that will permit circulation of air inside the covering.
D. Keep handling on site to a minimum. Exercise particular care to avoid damage to finishes of metals.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements:
1. Verify dimensions of supporting structure by field measurements before fabrication so that the entrance and
storefront work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. Indicate measurements on
Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Use
Contractor's lines and benchmarks as a basis for measurements.
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating entrance and storefront work without field measurements. Coordinate
supporting structure construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent
with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a 2 year written warranty, beginning from date of substantial completion, and executed
by the Contractor, manufacturer and the all glass entrance and storefront installer agreeing to repair or replace
components of entrance and storefront systems that develop defects in materials or workmanship within the
specified warranty period. Defects include, structural failures, sealant failures, deterioration of metals, metal
finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering, failure of operating components to function properly,
uncontrolled water leakage, uncontrolled air leakage, and any other evidence of failure or deterioration of the all
glass entrance and storefront work to meet performance requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I (transparent), tested for
surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II
materials.
1. Product: All glass shall be provided by fabricator of all -glass storefront system.
a. Class 1: Clear.
b. Minimum Thicknesses:
1) 1/2" thickness at transom panels as shown in Drawings.
2) 1/2" thickness at doors up to height of 8' -0 ".
3) 3/4" thickness at doors over height of 8' -0" and to height of 10' -6 ".
2. Exposed Edges: Flat edge (cut edge of glass is flat and surface edges are slightly arrised) with polished finish.
08450 -4 ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
B. Aluminum: AA Alloy 6063 and ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with tempering as required to suit performance
requirements and finishes specified.
1. Stainless -Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 316.
a. Surface Texture and Color: Use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including,
but not limited to, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Do not use
materials which have stains and discolorations which do not match the Architect's sample in color and grain
characteristics.
b. Surface Flatness and Edges: Provide materials which have been cold- rolled, cold - finished, cold- drawn,
stretcher leveled, machine cut and otherwise produced to the highest commercial standard for flatness with
edges and corners sharp and true to angle, as required.
c. Tempers: Fabricate from standard commercial tempers and hardnesses, as required for forming,
fabrication, strength and durability and which will finish to match the Architect's sample.
C. Stainless - Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 316 for plate and flat bar and ASTM A 276, Type 316 for bars and shapes.
I. Surface Texture and Color: Use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including, but
not limited to, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Do not use materials which
have stains and discolorations which do not match the Architect's sample in color and grain characteristics.
2. Surface Flatness and Edges: Provide materials which have been cold - rolled, cold - finished, cold- drawn,
stretcher leveled, machine cut and otherwise produced to the highest commercial standard for flatness with
edges and corners sharp and true to angle, as required.
3. Tempers: Fabricate from standard commercial tempers and hardnesses, as required for forming, fabrication,
strength and durability and which will finish to match the Architect's sample.
2.2 COMPONENTS
A. Glass Entrances: Provide an extruded aluminum retained, glass and metal framing system fabricated and finished to
suit the conditions indicated and specified. System shall be complete with all aluminum framing members,
fasteners, anchors, gaskets, washers, glass and glazing components. All aluminum members shall be finished as
specified under Article 2.5 `Aluminum Finishes'.
B. All components in the All -Glass Entrance assembly shall be provided by Oldcastle Glass.
C. Rails: Stainless - steel -clad aluminum.
1. Products: Oldcastle Glass, Constellation Series rails.
2. Adhesively laminate or mechanically clad base metal members, returning cladding around extrusions to
eliminate exposed edges.
3. Sizes:
a. Bottom Rail: 10" height with minimum 7" depth of glass retention into rail.
b. Top Rail: 4" height
4. Affix glass to rails with dry - glazed assembly.
D. Transom Header Bars:
1. Adhesively laminate or mechanically clad base metal members, returning cladding around extrusions to
eliminate exposed edges.
2. Size: 4" height, width to match top rails of doors
3. Affix glass to header bars with dry - glazed assembly.
E. Anchors, Fastenings, Stiffener End Cap Pins and Plugs, Friction Coupling Assemblies:
1. Material: Stainless steel.
2. Anchor and Fastener Metal Alloy Types, Designations and Standards: Alloys as selected by fabricator to
prevent corrosion resistance with the components fastened. Do not use self - drilling, self - tapping type fasteners.
F. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets: Permanent, nonmigrating types of material and in hardness recommended by all
glass storefront and entrance manufacturer and complying with the performance requirements.
ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES 08450 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
G. Slip and Separator Gaskets:
1. Bolted slip - joints: Non - metallic, low friction material bearing temperature and moisture resistances and low
abrasion properties as required to suit performance criteria.
2. Non - bolted slip joints: Non - corrosive, non -toxic impregnated felt, or butyl, tape with a pressure sensitive
adhesive on one surface which is formulated for proper adhesion to metals shown; gasket shall bear temperature
and moisture resistance properties as required to suit performance criteria; thickness and width as required.
H. Adhesives and Epoxies: As required for laminating cladding to base components.
I. Structural Silicone Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2.3 HARDWARE
A. Refer to the Drawings and Section 08711, DOOR HARDWARE.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate the entrances and transoms to the designs, shapes, and sizes shown using the materials, and
components, specified and shown to produce assemblies which meet or exceed the performance requirements. To
the greatest extent possible complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware applications and other work before
shipment to Project site.
1. Glass entrance doors shall be fabricated and factory - assembled by door manufacturer.
2. As far as practicable, all additional fitting and assembly work shall be done in a fabrication shop.
B. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, rails, and accessories before tempering glass. Do
not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering.
1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller- hearth) process and fabricate so, when installed, roll -wave distortion
is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.
2. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible.
C. Metal components of storefronts shall be cut, reinforced, drilled and tapped in strict accordance with the printed
door hardware manufacturers templates and instructions.
D. Joints in Metal Work: All exposed metal work shall be carefully fitted and matched to produce continuity of line
and design, with all joints, being accurately fitted for hairline contact and rigidly secured. Where additional rigidity
or strength is required to satisfy the performance requirements reinforce entrance components with aluminum or
carbon steel shapes, bars, and plates.
E. Exposed Fasteners: Not permitted.
F. Protection of Metals: Wherever dissimilar metals are in contact, except in the case of aluminum in contact with
galvanized steel, zinc, separate such surfaces with a coating of zinc rich primer, bituminous paint, or separation
gaskets as the condition requires. Wherever aluminum comes in contact with concrete surfaces separate such
surfaces with a coating of zinc rich primer, bituminous paint, or separation gaskets as the condition requires.
2.5 STAINLESS -STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
1. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, texture, graining and reflectivity matching Architect's sample.
2. Stainless -Steel Finish: NAAMM No. 4 satin directional polish.
08450 -6 ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
3. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave
surfaces chemically clean.
4. Protect finish with factory applied adhesive backed paper covering.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate entrance and storefront work with the work of other Sections and provide items to be placed during the
installation of other work at the proper time to avoid delays in the work.
B. Place such items, including concealed overhead framing, accurately in relation to the final location of entrance and
storefront components.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the substrates, adjoining construction, and conditions under which the Work is to be installed. Do not
proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Before beginning installation of the storefront work examine all parts of the existing building structural frame
and the existing building cladding indicated to support the storefront work. Notify Contractor in writing, of any
dimensions, or conditions, found which will prevent the proper execution of the entrance and storefront work,
including specified tolerances. Use Contractor's offset lines and bench marks as basis of measurements.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and
storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and
distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.
1. Cut and trim component parts of the entrance and storefront work during erection only with the approval of the
manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely to protect
material and remove all evidence of cutting and trimming. Remove and replace members where cutting and
trimming has impaired strength or appearance, as directed by Architect.
2. Set components within the erection tolerances with uniform joints where shown. Place components on
aluminum or stainless steel shims and fasten to supporting substrates using bolts and similar fasteners.
3. Do not erect components which are warped, deformed, bowed, defaced or otherwise damaged as to impair
strength. Remove and replace members damaged in the process of erection.
B. Entrance Doors: Doors shall be securely anchored in place to a straight, plumb and level condition, without
distortion. Adjust doors to operate smoothly, without binding, with hardware functioning properly. Hardware
movement, shall be field tested and final adjustment, and lubrication, made for proper operation and performance of
doors.
1. Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.
C. Transom Bars: Where Transom Bars occur, transom bars shall be installed and securely anchored in accordance
with glass entrance manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
D. Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.
E. Install silicone glazing sealant to comply with requirements of Division 8 Section "Glazing," unless otherwise
indicated.
ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES 08450 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. The entrance and storefront systems shall be fabricated and erected to accommodate the dimensional tolerances of
the structural frame and surrounding cladding, while providing the following as installed tolerances.
1. Variation from theoretical calculated position as located in plan or elevation in relation to established floors
lines, column lines and other fixed elements of the structure, including variations from plumb, level, straight
and member size: +/- 1/4" max. in any 20' -0" run, column -to- column bay, or floor -to -floor height.
2. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). Where
surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).
3. Variation from angle, or plumb, shown: +/- 1/8" max. in 10' -0" run or story height, non - cumulative.
4. Variation from slope, or level, shown: +/- 1/8" max. in any 20' -0" run or column -to- column bay, non-
cumulative.
3.5 ANCHORAGE
A. Anchorage of the storefront work to the structure and surrounding cladding shall be in accordance with the accepted
shop drawings.
3.6 WELDING
A. Weld with electrodes and by methods recommended by manufacturer of material being welded, and in accordance
with AWS D1.1 for concealed steel members. Use only methods which will avoid distortion, and discoloration, of
exposed faces.
B. Welds and adjacent metal areas shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with a single coat of bituminous paint.
3.7 REMOVAL OF DEBRIS
A. All debris caused by, or incidental to, the erection of the entrance and storefront work shall be removed from the site
and disposed of legally.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Clean metal surfaces promptly after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to factory finished exposed
surfaces.
B. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of
Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. Remove excess glazing and sealant
compounds, dirt, and other substances.
C. Immediately remove any deleterious material from surfaces of aluminum.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the construction period to ensure that
architectural metal entrance work will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at time of
acceptance.
08450 -8 ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
END OF SECTION 08450
•
ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES 08450 -9
•
01/16/09 - - GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805' 20080538
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
• •
08450 -10 ALL -GLASS ENTRANCES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08711 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes door hardware.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
1. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for astragals and smoke seals provided as part of a fire -rated
labeled assembly and for door silencers provided as part of the frame.
2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals and smoke seals provided as part of a fire -rated labeled
assembly.
3. Division 8 Section " Architectural Woodwork: Interior Stile and Rail Wood Doors " for astragals and smoke
seals provided as part of a fire -rated labeled assembly for stile and rail wood door hardware machining, and for
silencers at wood frames.
4. Division 8 Section "Access Doors" for access door hardware, except cylinders.
5. Division 8 Section "All -Glass Entrances" for entrance door hardware, except cylinders preparation.
6. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for blocking in partitions for wall- mounted hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit door hardware schedule prepared by or under the supervision of door hardware
supplier. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,
thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. The Architect's review of schedule shall neither be
construed as a complete check nor shall it relieve the Contractor of responsibility for errors, deviations, or omissions
from the specified requirements to provide complete door hardware for the project.
1. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations
of every item required for each door or opening.
2. Content: Include the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each door hardware set, cross - referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and
frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware. Supply templates to door and frame manufacturer(s) to enable
proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts for hardware. Detail any conditions requiring custom
extended lip strikes, or any other special or custom conditions.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
C. Keying Schedule: Cores and keys are provided by owner.
D. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions for
Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware.
F. Installation Instructions: Installation instructions for each type of hardware item shall be available at jobsite during
construction for Architect's reference.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-
service performance.
B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier, who has completed a minimum of three (3) projects over the last 5
years which were similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the project - as determined by the
Architect — and which have resulted in construction with a record of successful in service performance, and who is
or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with
Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.
C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware
Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door
hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. Provide hardware items complying with the applicable provisions for accessibility and usability by the disabled
and handicapped in compliance with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG "; and in California, California Code of Regulations, Title 24 Part 2, and Title
19.
2. NFPA 101: Comply with applicable provisions for means of egress doors.
F. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2 and
NFPA 80; or 2006 IBC and UL 1784, that are listed and labeled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. for fire ratings
indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. See Drawings for applicable code conformance. Provide only
door hardware items that are identical to items tested by UL for the types and sizes of doors required. In case of
conflict between type of hardware specified and type required for accessibility or fire protection, furnish type
required by NFPA and UL. Doors indicated in fire rated partitions and walls shall be positive latching and self -
closing, with smoke gaskets where required by applicable codes.
1. Wherever exit device hardware is required on doors, comply with UL 305. Furnish hardware to door
manufacturer for installation at factory. Provide supplementary label, "Fire Exit Hardware ", on each exit device
to certify that panic hardware has been panic Toad tested with door.
2. Keying: Lock cores and keys provided by Owner's vendor. Coordinate installation with Owner.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include
basic installation instructions with each item or package.
08711-2 DOOR HARDWARE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE. #2805
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into
concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place
Concrete."
B. Templates: Furnish templates and door hardware schedules, coordinated for the application of door hardware items •
with door and frame details, to door opening fabricators and trades performing door opening work to permit the
preparation of doors and frames to receive the specified door hardware. Where the door hardware item scheduled is
not adaptable to the finished size of door opening members requiring door hardware, submit an item having a similar
operation and quality to the Architect for review. Each door hardware item shall be fabricated to templates.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Warranty, Period for Manual Closers: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion.
•
C. Warranty Period for Concealed Floor Closers: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets are
keyed to each scheduled door in the door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule on the Drawings.
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products
in complete sets to function as intended.
2. The, hardware supplier shall review each hardware set and compare it with the door types, details, and sizes as
shown and verify each. hardware item for function, hand, backset, and method of fastening through shop
drawing submittals.
3. While the hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors, and establish a type and standard of quality, it shall
be the specific duty and responsibility of the finish hardware, supplier to examine the drawings and
specifications, and to furnish proper hardware for all openings, whether listed or not. •
2.2 HINGES AND PIVOTS
A. Butt Hinge Products:
•
1. Standard Weight, Plain Bearing, 5 Knuckle, Steel: Complying with BHMA A156.I A8133.
2. Heavy Weight, Ball Bearing, 5 Knuckle, Steel: Complying with BHMA A156.1 A8111.
•
B. Pivot and Pivot Hinge Products:
1. Center Pivots: Mortised, non - handed, head mounted top pivot , with sealed bearings. Furnish with 3/4
diameter spindles. At soffit mounted applications, provide 1 -3/4" engagement of pivot pin into top of door rail.
At transom mounted applications, provide 3/4" engagement of pivot pin into top of door rail or top of patch
fitting. Complying with BHMA A156.4 C07032.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. General Hinge and Pivot Characteristics: Where door jamb or trim projects to such an extent that the width of leaf
specified will not allow the door to clear such frame or trim, furnish hinges and pivots with leaves of sufficient
width to clear. Hinges and pivots shall be template hinges conforming to BHMA A156.1 and in accordance with
door and frame material requirements.
1. Pivot Hinge Special Layouts: At deep reveals where door frame profiles will not permit the use of a standard
top pivot (e.g. deep reveals, narrow frames, full height doors) furnish top pivots less top leaf with specially
designed and fabricated pivot block.
D. Butt Hinge and Offset Pivot Hinge Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to and including 60 inches (1524 mm).
2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights of greater than 60 inches (1524 mm) to and including 90 inches (2286
mm).
3. Four Hinges: For doors with heights greater than 90 inches (2286 mm) to and including 120 inches (3048 mm).
4. Provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 120 inches (3048 mm).
E. Butt Hinge Sizes: 4 -1/2 inches (114 mm) h. by 4 inches (102 mm) or 4 -1/2 inches (114 mm) w. for doors up to and
including 36 inches (914 mm) in width; 5 inches (127 mm) h. by 4 inches (102 mm) or 4 -1/2 inches (1 14 mm) w. for
doors greater than 36 inches (914 mm) in width.
F. Hinge Characteristics: Full mortise type with square corners. All butt hinges are to have non - rising pins for interior
hinges, and all exterior butt hinges are to be made of non - ferrous base metal and have non - removable pins (NRP).
Provide only steel bodied butt and pivot hinges at labeled doors. All butt hinges shall be furnished with button tips.
G. Fasteners: Package all hinges and pivots with machine and wood screws as required by door and frame
construction.
2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A. Bored Lock and Latch Sets: Heavy duty, commercial, cylindrical bodies complying with BHMA A156.2 Series
4000, Grade 1. Furnish cylindrical type, field reversible, lock and latch sets with deadlocking brass or stainless steel
latch bolts having a minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) throw together with guard (auxiliary) latch added to bolt, 2 -3/4
inches (70 mm) backset, and UL listed for 3 hour single doors. All lock and latch sets, to be furnished complete
with heavy gage steel zinc dichromate coated cylindrical bodies, trim, 2 -1/4 inches (57 mm) by 1 -1/8 inches (28.6
mm) beveled square cornered fronts, and cylinders as described in Item 2.6 in this Section. Provide wrought steel,
aluminum, or black plastic, box strikes for each lock and latch set with curved lips of sufficient length to protect
frames. Provide plated cast zinc levers with plated wrought brass or bronze roses.
B. Bottom Rail Mortised Deadlocks: Heavy duty, commercial, deadlock complying with BHMA A156.5 Type E8211,
Grade 1. Where thumb turn, or key, cylinders are scheduled, furnish types as specified for mortise locks fitted with
proper cams.
2.4 EXIT DEVICES
A. Exit Devices: Exit devices and exit device accessories shall conform to BHMA A156.3, Grade 1. Trim shall be
wrought construction and commercial plain design with straight, beveled or smoothly rounded sides, corners and
edges. Keyed devices shall be furnished less cylinders. Cylinders shall be as herein specified keyed to building
system.
B. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
08711 -4 DOOR HARDWARE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and
NFPA 252.
D. Outside Trim: Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.
2.5 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Cores for Bored Cylindrical Locksets at Fitting Rooms: Provide key -in -lever 6 pin cores for bored cylindrical
locksets at Fitting Rooms, as manufactured by the bored lockset manufacturer.
B. Interchangeable Cores at Manager Controlled Doors: Provide Gap standard Best 7 pin interchangeable core
cylinders where Best cylinders are indicated on Hardware Schedule. Provide cylinders in mortise or rim
configurations as required for each device.
C. Provide cylinders for installation into all locking devices.
D. Keying System: Final keying to determine lock cylinders, keyed alike sets, level of keying, master key groups,
grandmaster keying system shall be as supplied by Owner.
1. Temporary Cylinders: Provide temporary cylinders in locks during construction and as may be necessary for
security or as may be requested by the Owner. All temporary cylinders shall be individually keyed as required
and subject to a single master key.
2.6 STRIKES
A. Strikes for Locks and Latches: All strikes for locks and latches shall be provided by the lock and latch manufacturer
unless otherwise specified or scheduled, refer to Article `Locks and Latches'.
1. Dustproof Floor Strikes: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Type L04251 or L14021
2. Radius Face Strikes at Aluminum Storefront Doors: Manufacturer's standard stainless - steel, radiused face
strike with steel mounting plate and black - plastic dustbox.
2.7 OPERATING TRIM (PUSHES AND PULLS)
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
B. Back to Back Pulls: Fabricate push pulls for back to back mounting from stainless steel bar stock in finish as
scheduled. Furnish spacers threaded to accept concealed throughbolt attachment including provision for spanner
tightening of bolts of assembly. Do not provide baseplates at stile to pull interface.
C. Single Pulls: Fabricate push pulls for single -sided mounting from stainless steel bar stock in finish as scheduled.
Furnish throughbolt attachment.
2.8 CLOSERS
A. Closing Cycle: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," whichever are more stringent.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
B. Verify requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and revise below to suit Project. Low opening -force
requirements may cause door closers to fail to operate properly and lead to doors' standing open.
1. Opening Force: Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements for locations indicated:
a. Interior Doors: 5 Ibf (22.2 N) at all locations.
C. Surface - Mounted Closers: Closers shall be certified by ETL laboratories and the manufacturer to a minimum of
8,000,000 cycles and meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Closers shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defects
in materials and workmanship for a minimum of 10 years. Closers used in conjunction with overhead stops and
holders shall be templated and coordinated to function properly. Properly detail closers to meet application
requirements by providing drop plates, brackets, etc. to meet application and installation requirements as indicated.
Comply with manufacturers recommendations for size of door closer depending on size of door, air pressure
conditions, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Closers shall have adjustable spring power, full
rack and pinion, independent closing speed and latch regulating V- slotted valves, fully hydraulic with a high
strength cast iron cylinder and solid forged steel arms, bore diameter of 1 -1/2 ", pinion shaft diameter of 5/8 ",
adjustable back check, cushion and built -in stop feature where scheduled, hold open arms where scheduled, delayed
action where scheduled, arm finish to match closer cover finish scheduled. Provide full metal molded covers of
clean line design with plated or primed for manufacturer's standard powder coat paint finish as scheduled. and that
require removal in order to make adjustments to closer.
D. Floor Closers: Closer sizes shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for size of door, air pressure conditions,
exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. with special details as follows: Closers shall be warranted by
the manufacturer against defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum of 10 years. Properly detail closers
to meet application and installation requirements as indicated. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for
size of door closer depending on size of door, air pressure conditions, and anticipated frequency of use. Closers
shall have independent closing speed and latch regulating valves, adjustable hydraulic back check cushion, and hold
open function.
1. Special Details:
a. Cover Plates: Provide manufacturers standard cover plate finished to match exposed portions of provided
butts or pivots where thresholds are not scheduled.
b. Back Check: All floor closers shall be manufactured with separate independent valves for closing
adjustment, latching adjustment, and backchecking adjustment.
c. All floor closers shall have back check beginning at 70 degrees.
2.9 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A. Kick and Armor Plates: Fabricate protection plates from minimum 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick stainless steel,
beveled top and 2 sides (B3E), square corners, complying with BHMA A156.6, and fastened with oval head Phillips
fasteners countersunk into plate surface.
B. Size: Furnish kick and armor plates sized 2 inches (51 mm) less than door width. Furnish kickplates in 10 inches
(305 mm) heights, furnish armor plates in 36 inches (1219 mm) heights unless otherwise indicated. Provide
protective plates with cutouts for locks, louvers and windows to the extent indicated. Mount protective plates flush
with bottom of door.
2.10 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. Floor Stops: Provide types of floor stops as indicated on Hardware Schedule.
08711-6 DOOR HARDWARE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
B. Wall Stops: Cast disc type with concave rubber bumper, having a 2 -1/2 inch (63.5 mm) diameter base with nominal
1 inch (25 mm) projection and concealed attachment to substrate.
1. For Attachment to Gypsum Wallboard: Complying with BHMA A156.16, Type L12251 or L12101.
2.11 DOOR GASKETING
A. Gasket: Self adhesive flexible silicone type, continuous gaskets for installation at all heads and jambs of doors.
B. Smoke seals: Self adhesive flexible silicone type, continuous gaskets for installation at all heads and jambs of
doors, UL listed.
C. Meeting Stile Smoke Seals: Self adhesive flexible silicone type, continuous gaskets for installation at meeting stiles
of doors, UL listed.
D. Astragals: UL listed for use on labeled doors, surface applied continuous extruded aluminum minimum 7/8" wide
retaining EPDM gaskets for installation on both sides of all meeting stiles of doors:
E. Door Sweep: Continuous door bottom aluminum extrusion with continuous nylon brush pile sweep; sweep shall be
field cut to length required to have positive contact with threshold without binding door.
2.12 THRESHOLDS
A. Saddle Threshold: Continuous extruded aluminum double - beveled type with grooved top not to exceed overall
height of ". Grooves shall have flat bottoms and depth not exceeding 1/16 ". Cut ends of threshold to fit profile of
door frame. Provide mitered returns at exposed ends.
B. Half Saddle Threshold Assembly at All Glass Entrances: Continuous extruded aluminum single - beveled type with
grooved top not to exceed overall height of 1/4 ". Grooves shall have flat bottoms and depth not exceeding 1/16 ".
Provide removable threshold coverplate sections at floor closers. Factory cut threshold to half saddle width
indicated in Hardware Schedule. Factory fabricate threshold closer coverplate sections to receive closer spindles and
to provide access to closer adjustment valves. Field cut coverplate sections to fit profile of door jamb.
C. Ramp Thresholds: Continuous extruded aluminum modular ramp type with fluted top not to exceed ramp slope of
1" rise in 12" of horizontal run. Cut ends of threshold to fit profile of door frame. Provide sloped mitered returns at
exposed ends.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE
A. Lock Protectors: Fabricated from heavy gauge metal and in finish as scheduled. Fabricate lock protectors with no
exposed fasteners on face of lock protector. Furnish protectors sized to cover the latch bolt area of the door and lock
and narrow enough to clear rose and escutcheon lock trims, offset formed to clear strike projection. Machine lock
protectors where required to accommodate rose and escutcheon trims, and cylinders.
B. Door - Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, flip -up type for mounting on door bottom rail and with rubber
shoe.
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.14 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for
machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards
for application intended. Provide Phillips oval -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware
item being attached. Machine screws and expansion shields shall be used for attaching hardware to concrete and
masonry. Use throughbolts for renovation work only where existing door blocking and reinforcements are
unknown.
1. Concealed Fasteners: All new doors and door frames have been specified with adequate blocking and
reinforcement provisions to eliminate exposed throughbolting of hardware items. Doors installed with exposed
throughbolts will be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Where through bolts are
used on existing doors provide sleeves for each through bolt.
2.15 FINISHES
A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Finishes of the same designation, that come from 2 or more sources, shall match
when the items are viewed at arms length and approximately 2' apart. Unless otherwise scheduled, match each
hardware item in a single hardware set with the scheduled latch or lock set finish. Painting of BHMA 600 (USP)
surfaces is required and is specified under Division 9 Section `Painting':
C. Designations: The abbreviations used to schedule hardware finishes are generally BHMA (Federal Standards where
indicated in parenthesis) designations. Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
following:
1. BHMA 600 (USP): Primed for painting.
2. BHMA 626 (US26D): Satin chromium plated.
3. BHMA 628 (US28): Satin aluminum, clear anodized.
4. BHMA 630 (US32D): Satin stainless steel.
5. Alum.: Aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Hardware for fire door assemblies shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 80. Hardware for smoke control door
assemblies shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 105. Install hardware for non - labeled and non -smoke door
assemblies in accordance DHI Al 15 (for steel doors and frames, DHI Al 15 -W series for wood doors, and hardware
manufacturers installation instructions for doors and frames fabricated from other than steel or wood.
B. Smoke Seals at S Labeled Door Assemblies: Provide and install smoke seals at S labeled doors in accordance with
seal manufacturers fire -label instructions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at the following heights, unless specifically indicated on the
drawings or required to comply with governing regulations:
08711 -8 DOOR HARDWARE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
1. Locks and Latches: 38 inches (956 mm) to center of lever from finish floor.
2. Door Pulls: As described in drawings.
3. Door Pulls: Pull bases centered on top and bottom door rails, and spaced from lock edge of door stile as
indicated, or recommended, by the pull manufacturer.
4. Push Plates: 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to center of plate. Coordinate with pull location.
5. Horizontal Push/Pull Bar: As described in drawings.
6. Butt Hinges: 10 inches (254 mm) to bottom of lowest hinge from finish floor; 5 inches (127 mm) to top of
upper hinge from top of door; space intermediate hinges equally between lower and upper hinges.
7. Deadbolts: Not more than 44 inches (1118 mm) from finish floor to operating trim.
8. Exit Device: As described in drawings.
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install overhead surface closers
for maximum degree of opening obtainable. Place on room side of corridor doors, stair side of stair doors,
secondary corridor side of doors between corridors. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware
onto or into surfaces that are later to be finished, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective
trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface - mounted items until finishes
have been completed on substrates involved.
C. Do not install permanent key cylinders in locks until the time of preliminary acceptance by the Owner. At the time
of preliminary acceptance, and in the presence of the Owner's representative, permanent key all lock cylinders.
Record and file all keys in the key control system specified, and turn system over to Owner for sole possession and
control.
D. Thresholds: Thresholds shall be secured with a minimum of 3 fasteners per single door width and 6 fasteners per
double door width with a maximum spacing of 12 inches (305 mm). Minimum screw size shall be No. 10 length,
dependent on job conditions, with a minimum of 3/4 inch (19 mm) thread engagement into the floor or anchoring
device used. Screw heads to be countersunk and flush with face of threshold. Set thresholds for exterior and
acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Wall- mounted devices: coordinate with wall and partition construction for location of blocking.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of
every hardware component. Replace hardware components that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust
back check on door closers at time of closer installation. Adjust door control devices to compensate for building
stack pressures and final operation of forced air mechanical equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility
requirements.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean hardware components as necessary to restore
proper finish. Provide protection during the progress of the work and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware
is in perfect working order and without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE — SCHEDULED DOORS
A. See Hardware Schedule on Drawings.
End of Section
DOOR HARDWARE 08711 -9
•
•
01/16/09 -
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 200805
•
Page left .intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•Nzr
•
•
• -
•
• . • 'le
•
• •
•
0871 DOOR HARDWARE
_ , • 3, • .• - - „ • ' • 1 ,, • : '17
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections
where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
1. Windows.
2. Doors.
3. Glazed entrances.
4. Storefront framing.
B. Refer to Division 8 Section "All -Glass Entrances" and "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" for requirements
applicable to single subcontract responsibility for glazing.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide and install watertight and airtight glazing systems capable of withstanding thermal movement and
wind and impact loads without failure of any kind, including loss or breakage of glass, failure of seal or gaskets,
exudation of glazing sealants, and excessive deterioration of glazing materials.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses and heat treatments indicated are minimum requirements. Glazing details shown
are for convenience of detailing only and are to be confirmed by the Contractor relative to cited standards and final
framing details. Confirm glass thicknesses and heat treatments, verified by analysis, as required to meet the
performance and testing requirements specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts ".
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B. Glass Manufacturers Letter: The glass manufacturer shall submit a letter certifying that he has reviewed the glazing
details proposed for the project, including the use of gaskets and sealants, and that each product to be furnished is
recommended for the application shown.
C. Thermal Stress and Wind Load Analyses: Submit the following from the glass manufacturer:
I. Thermal stress analysis for each exterior glass unit type, each building elevation. The analysis shall clearly
indicate all the expected service temperature ranges and the effects of partial and full shading on the glass.
Append to the thermal stress analysis a statement from the glass manufacturer that based upon this analysis that
the resulting thermal stresses will not reduce the specified "statistical probability of breakage ".
2. Wind load analysis for each glass unit type, each building elevation. The analysis shall clearly indicate that the
statistical probability of breakage at the design wind pressure will not exceed the specified statistical probability
of breakage.
D. Samples: Label samples to indicate product, characteristics, and locations in the work. Furnish samples of the
following:
1. Except for clear glass, submit samples of each glass type specified, in the form of 12 -inch- (300 -mm -) square
Samples.
2. Submit samples of each glass type specified where production run variations, and defects are expected.
E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
GLAZING 08800 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities
and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
architects and owners, and other information specified.
G. Product Test Reports: Submit product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated.
H. Warranties: Submit special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent
to that indicated for Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in- service
performance.
B. Source Limitations for Glass and Glass Accessories: Obtain glass and glass accessories from one source for each
product indicated below:
1. Primary glass.
2. Heat treated glass.
3. Glazing gaskets.
C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according
to NFPA 252.
D. Fire -Rated Window Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according
to NFPA 257.
E. Safety Glass: Comply with the applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal and
Municipal authorities having jurisdiction, wherever requirements conflict the more stringent shall be required.
Obtain approvals from all such authorities. As a minimum provide Category II materials complying with testing
requirements in 16 CFR 1201 (Consumer Product Safety Commission "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing
Materials ", as published in the Code of Federal Regulations) and ANSI Z97.1.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety glass with certification label of Safety
Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations
below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise
defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA'S "Glazing Manual" and "Laminated Glass Design Guide."
2. SIGMA Publications: SIGMA TM -3000, "Vertical Glazing Guidelines."
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass
and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,
frost, condensation, or other causes.
08800 -2 GLAZING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS
A. Refer to the drawings for the extent of glass types and locations. Glass types indicated on the drawings are keyed to
the Part 3 Glass Schedule Articles at the end of this section. The Contractor shall confirm the levels of heat
treatment required for each glass type scheduled as contained in Articles Performance Requirements, Submittals and
Quality Assurance.
2.2 PRIMARY FLOAT GLASS
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class as indicated in
schedules at the end of Part 3.
B. Available Glass Manufacturers:
1. PPG
2. LOF
3. Ford Glass
2.3 HEAT - TREATED FLOAT GLASS
A. General: Heat treat glass where the need is determined by thermal stress analyses, by wind load analyses, and where
required to meet safety glazing requirements.
B. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller- hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of
installed glass unit.
C. Sizes and Cutting: Prior to heat treatment, cut glass to required sizes as determined by accurate measurement of
openings to be glazed, making allowance for required edge clearances. Cut and process edges in accordance with
glass manufacturer's recommendations. Do not cut or treat edges in the field.
D. Heat - Strengthened Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind HS. Surface compression range shall
be between 4,000 psi (27.6 MPa) and 7,000 psi (48 MPa).
E. Fully Tempered Glass: Provide glass complying with ASTM C1048 Kind FT and meeting the requirements of
ANSI Z97.1. Surface compression shall be equal to or greater than 10,000 psi (69 MPa).
F. Flatness Tolerances: All heat treated glass shall be fabricated to the following flatness tolerances:
1. Overall Bow and Warp: Not greater than the maximum bow and warp tolerances in any direction as listed in
ASTM C1048 Table 2. Localized warp limited to 1/32 inch in 12 inches (0.79 mm in 304.8 mm).
2. Roll Ripple: The deviation from flatness at any peak (peak to valley deviation) shall not exceed 0.003 inches for
6 mm (0.0762 mm for 6 mm) thick glass.
2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS
A. Gasket, Blocking, and Spacer Wet Glazing Materials: Silicone, compatible with and adherent to each material it will
be in contact with, as recommended by the manufacturer to fulfill performance requirements.
GLAZING 08800 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
B. Butt Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants ", Article "Elastomeric Joint Sealants ",
subparagraph "Butt Glazing Joints at Curtain Wall Vision Glass ".
C. Structural Glazing Sealants: Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants," Article "Elastomeric Joint Sealants,"
subparagraph "Structural Glazing at Curtain Wall Spandrel Glass."
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards
referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:
1. EPDM, ASTM C 864.
2. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.
B. Continuous Structural Spacer Tape: AAMA 800. Continuous extruded silicone or silicone compatible rubber, with
cross sectional profile, physical properties, and tolerances as recommended by the window and curtain wall
manufacturer, and as required, to comply with the performance requirements specified and shown. Gaskets /Spacers
shall be tested for compatibility with silicone sealants and shall be subject to the acceptance of the sealant
manufacturer.
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of
manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of
compatibility with surfaces, and wet glazing materials, contacted in installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM C I 115 (Type C), blocks, 85 +/- 5 Shore A durometer hardness, 1/16
inch (1.5 -mm) less than the channel width, and length based on the square footage of the glass unit to be supported
in accordance with GANA standards and glass manufacturer recommendations but not less than 4 inches (101.6
mm).
D. Edge Blocks: Silicone complying with ASTM CI 115 (Type C), blocks, 65 +/- 5 Shore A durometer hardness,
minimum 4 inches (101.6 mm) long and sized to allow 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) clearance between edge of glass and
block.
E. Perimeter Insulation for Fire - Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire- resistance
rating.
F. Metal Channels for Butt Glazing: Extruded aluminum, anodized, sizes as shown and as required to support and to
provide full engagement of glass.
2.7 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer
and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements.
1. Edge and Surface Conditions: Comply with the recommendations of AAMA "Structural Properties of Glass"
for "clean -cut" edges, except comply with manufacturer's recommendations when they are at variance
therewith.
B. Cutting: Do not nip glass edges. Edges may be wheel cut or sawed and seamed at manufacturer's option. For glass
to be cut at site, provide glass 2 inches (50.8 mm) larger than required in both dimensions, so as to facilitate cutting
of clean cut edges without the necessity of seaming or nipping. Do not cut, seam, nip or abrade heat - treated glass.
08800 -4 GLAZING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier and glass framing erector present, for compliance with the following:
1. Compliance with the specified manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,
and offsets at corners.
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass- framing members.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing stops, glazing channels, and rabbets which will be in contact with the glazing materials immediately
before glazing.
1. Remove coatings which might fail in adhesion or interfere with bond of sealants.
2. Comply with manufacturers instructions for final wiping of surfaces immediately before application of primers.
3. Wipe metal surfaces with IPA (isopropyl alcohol) unless otherwise required by compatibility and adhesion
testing results.
B. Prime surfaces to receive glazing compounds. When priming, comply with wet glazing manufacturers
recommendations.
C. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation. Do not install any pieces which are improperly sized or
have damaged edges, scratches or abrasion or other evidence of damage. Remove labels from glass immediately
after installation.
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials,
unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
1. All glass units shall be installed in accordance with the glass manufacturers recommendations.
B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face
clearances, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and
legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when
installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
D. Apply primers to surfaces indicated to receive glazing materials. Use primers as determined by preconstruction
compatibility and adhesion testing.
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless more
stringent requirements are recommended by glass manufacturer. Place blocks to allow water passage to weep holes.
1. For Glass Units Less Than 72 inches (1830 mm): Locate setting blocks at sill one - quarter of the width in from
each end of the glass unless otherwise recommended by the glass manufacturer.
2. For Glass Units 72 inches (1830 mm) or Greater: Locate setting blocks at sill one - eighth of the width in from
each end of the glass, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm), unless otherwise recommended by the glass
manufacturer.
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
GLAZING 08800 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
G. Provide edge blocking to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, sized and located to comply
with the glass manufacturers recommendations and the requirements in referenced glazing publications.
H. Set glass lites with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics, producing the greatest possible degree of
uniformity in appearance on the entire exterior wall elevation.
1. Set glass units with void between edge of units and glazing channel.
I. Where wedge- shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize gasket on opposite side, provide
adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.
J. Miter cut gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners
from pulling away and join with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer which will provide an airtight and
watertight seal at the joint.
3.4 STRUCTURAL SILICONE GLAZING
A. Structurally Glazed Glass: Comply with mullion manufacturer's written instructions for field glazing, but not Tess
than as follows.
1. Apply continuous structural spacer tape to mullions.
2. Set glass units on setting blocks on setting block chairs.
3. Align glass unit edges over continuous structural spacer tape and secure with manufacturer's recommended
temporary cleats.
4. Structurally seal glass unit to mullions with specified one -part structural silicone sealant. Tool structural
silicone flush in alignment to mullion face and perpendicular to face of glass light; remove excess structural
silicone from glass and metal substrates.
5. After full cure of structural silicone sealant, remove temporary cleats. Any holes left in the mullions which
were caused by the temporary cleats shall be sealed immediately.
6. Insert and shape weatherseal joint backer rods, or gaskets, into void between glass units and at a proper depth to
receive silicone weatherseal sealant.
7. Place silicone weatherseal sealant into void and tool flush with adjacent exterior glass light faces; remove
excess sealant from glass and metal substrates.
B. Butt Glazed Glass:
1. Insert a full- height greased dowel into vertical void between glass units, at a proper depth to act as a form for
sealant.
•
2. Place sealant into void and tool flush with adjacent glass light faces; remove excess sealant from glass and
metal substrates. Remove dowel.
3.5 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held
away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended
by glass manufacturer.
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals
during construction, but not less than once a month, for build -up of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as
recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way and from any source,
including natural causes, accidents, and vandalism.
08800 -6 GLAZING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for
inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer.
3.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT -GLASS SCHEDULE
A. Uncoated Clear Float Glass: Where glass as designated below is indicated, provide Type I (transparent glass, flat),
Class 1 (clear) glass lites complying with the following:
1. Uncoated Clear Annealed Float Glass: Annealed or Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated
surfaces) where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of
individual glass lites and to comply with performance requirements.
2. Uncoated Clear Fully Tempered Float Glass: Kind FT (fully tempered).
END OF SECTION 08800
GLAZING 08800 -7
_ .
.01216/09, ",. • GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
•
Page, left intentionally blank
•
•
-
. .
• "f •
• ,
r
- ,
08800-8 GLAZING
. .
_ _ , _ _ 1- • - • ‘"•,, r „ , . • . .7 • '2.:‘ r.
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 08830 - MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Mirrored glass.
B. Related Sections:
1. See Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for wood doors with mirrored glass inserts.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under
the National Glass Association's Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master
Glaziers).
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations in GANA's "Glazing Manual," unless more
stringent requirements are indicated.
C. NAAMM's Publication: For silvered mirrored glass, comply with recommendations in NAAMM's "Mirrors,
Handle with Extreme Care, Tips for the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."
D. Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. For silvered mirrored glass, comply with mirrored glass manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing,
and handling mirrored glass as needed to prevent deterioration of shivering, damage to edges, and abrasion of
glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from moisture including condensation.
1.4 WARRANTY . -
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrored glass units that
deteriorate f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1. Deterioration of Silvered Mirrored Glass: Defects developed from normal use not caused by maintaining
and cleaning mirrored glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include discoloration,
black spots, and clouding of the silver film.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOAT GLASS
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat).
1. Clear: Class 1 (clear), Quality q2 (mirror).
a. Thickness: 6 mm.
MIRRORS 08830 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.2 MIRRORED GLASS
A. Silvered Mirrored Glass:
1. Available manufacturers:
a. American Mirror Company, Inc.
b. Carolina Mirror Company.
c. Donisi Mirror Company.
d. Gardner Glass Products.
e. Gilded Mirrors, Inc.
f. Lenoir Mirror Company.
g. Stroupe Mirror Co., Inc.
h. Sunshine Mirror.
i. Virginia Mirror Co., Inc.
j. VVP America, Inc.; Binswanger Mirror Products.
k. Walker Glass Co., Ltd.
2. Annealed Float Glass: Clear.
3. Silvering: Successive layers of chemically deposited silver, electrically or chemically deposited copper,
and manufacturer's standard organic protective coating applied to second glass surface to produce coating
system complying with FS DD-M-411.
B. Fabrication:
1. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrored glass without marring visible surfaces. Locate
and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrored glass.
2. Mirrored Glass Edge Treatment: Flat polished.
a. Silvered Mirror Glass: Seal edges after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric
penetration of glass coating.
b. Factory Fabricate: Perform edge treatment and sealing in factory immediately after cutting to final
sizes.
C. Vinyl- Backed Safety Mirrored Glass: Apply vinyl backing with pressure- sensitive adhesive coating over glass
coating as recommended by vinyl- backing manufacturer to produce a surface free of bubbles, blisters, and other
imperfections. Use adhesives and vinyl backing compatible with mirrored glass as certified by organic coating
manufacturer.
1. Provide vinyl- backed mirrors for installation in or on doors.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70 to 90 Shore A hardness.
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirrored glass manufacturer for use in
protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrored glass by spot
application.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Palmer Products Corporation "Quik -Set Mirror Mastic"
b. Somer and Mac Industries "Super Gum Grip"
c. UltraBond by Gunther Mirror Mastics.
D. Stainless Steel Trim: Sections with returns that produce glazing channels to accommodate mirrored glass
thickness.
1. Trim: J- channels formed with front leg and back leg not Tess than 5/16 and 7/8 inch (8 and 22 mm) in
height, respectively.
a. Product: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; CRL Stainless Steel "J" Channel, No. SS960.
08830 -2 MIRRORS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2. Mirror Divider: I- shaped sections formed with front flange 1/2 inch wide.
a. Product: C. R. Laurence Co., Inc.; CRL Stainless Steel Mirror Divider, No. SS961.
E. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal.
F. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation. Provide toothed or lead- shield
expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in -place anchors. Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on
inside face of exterior walls and where indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of mirror mastic with existing
finishes or primers.
B. Install mirrored glass units to comply with written instructions of mirrored glass manufacturer and with referenced
GANA and NAAMM publications. Mount mirrored glass accurately in place in a manner that avoids distorting
reflected images.
C. Provide space for air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting surface.
D. Installation in Stile and Rail Wood Doors:
1. See Division 8 Section "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for door construction.
2. Install mirrors on indicated side of flat panels of stile and rail wood doors, using mastic spot installation
system.
3. Install wood moldings with finishing nails or brads, according to AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality
Standards" for wood glazing stops in doors.
E. Mastic Spot Installation System:
1. Apply barrier coat to mirrored glass backing where approved in writing by manufacturers of mirrored glass
and backing material.
2. Apply mastic in spots to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and to allow
air circulation between back of mirrored glass units and face of mounting surface.
3. After mastic is applied, align mirrored glass units and press into place while maintaining a minimum air
space of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between back of mirrored glass and mounting surface.
F. For wall- mounted mirrored glass units, install permanent means of support at bottom and top edges with bottom
support designed to withstand mirrored glass weight and top support designed to prevent mirrored glass from
coming away from wall along top edges.
1. Attach mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors or
inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of mirrored glass units.
2. For continuous bottom supports, provide setting blocks 1/8 inch (2 mm) thick by 4 inches (100 mm) long at
quarter points. For channels or other continuous supports in which water could be trapped, provide,
between setting blocks, two slotted weeps not less than 1/4 inch (3 mm) wide by 3/8 inch (4.5 mm) long.
3. Unless otherwise noted, install bottom and top trim. Fabricate trim in single lengths to fit and cover top
and bottom edges of mirrored glass units.
4. Where indicated, install trim on all sides. Fabricate trim in single lengths for each side. Miter corners.
5. Where indicated, install mirror divider. Fabricate trim in single lengths. Tightly butt divider to adjacent
trim.
G. Protect mirrored glass from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from construction operations.
1. Do not permit edges of silvered mirrored glass to be exposed to standing water.
MIRRORS 08830 -3
01/16/09' - - - GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR -STORE #2805 20080538
2. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent silvered mirrored glass from being exposed to
moisture from.condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.
END OF SECTION 08830
•
•
•
1:
•
•
•
08830 -4 MIRRORS
•
r .
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TTGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Interior gypsum wallboard.
2. Tile backing panels.
3. Abuse - resistant gypsum wallboard.
4. Non -load- bearing steel framing.
B. Related Sections: See Division 11 Section "Retail Display Specialties" for peg boards.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated. Include schedule of stud metal thickness for each partition type.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire - Test - Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire- resistance ratings, provide materials
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to
ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for
product selection:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers
specified.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING
A. Steel Framing, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Metal complying with ASTM C 645 requirements.
a. Protective Coating:
1) Interior Applications: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot -dip galvanized zinc coating.
2. Manufacturers of Steel Framing and Furring:
a. MarinoWare; Division of Ware Industries.
b. Dale Industries, Inc. — Dale/Incor.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
c. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
d. Unimast, Inc.
B. Suspended Ceiling Framing:
1. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- (1.59 -mm -) diameter
wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- (1.21 -mm -) diameter wire.
2. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
a. Power- Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,
fabricated from corrosion- resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching
hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times
that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency.
3. Wire Hangers, unless otherwise required: ASTM A 641/A 64IM, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -
inch (4.12 -mm) diameter.
4. Rod Hangers, where required by local building code: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.
a. Diameter: 1/4 -inch (6.34 -mm).
b. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot -dip galvanized.
5. Carrying Channels: Cold- rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37
mm), a minimum 1/2 -inch- (12.7 -mm -) wide flange, and in depth indicated.
6. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
a. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.
1) Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
C. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and
cross - furring members that interlock.
1. Available Products:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Furring Systems /Drywall.
b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring 640 System.
c. USG Corp.; Drywall Suspension System (Curved and Flat).
D. Partition and Soffit Framing:
1. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: Comply with ASTM C 754 and the following:
a. Stud Depth: Indicated in partition type details.
b. Stud Height: Indicated on drawings.
c. Lateral Pressure: 5 pounds per square foot.
d. Limit of Maximum Deflection:
1) L/240, unless indicated otherwise.
2) L/360, at walls to receive subsequent rigid finishes, such as tile or plaster.
3. Provide 0.0312 -inch thick studs at fire door frames.
4. Proprietary Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of gypsum board
applied to interior partitions resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness indicated for studs
and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products:
1) Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).
2) Metal -Lite, Inc.; Slotted Track.
3) The Steel Network, Inc; VertiClip SLD Series or VertiTrack VTD Series.
5. Proprietary Firestop Track: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with
movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire- resistance -rated assembly indicated; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
a. Available Products:
1) Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.
2) Metal -Lite, Inc.; The System.
3) The Steel Network, Inc: VertiClip SLD Series or VertiTrack VTD Series.
09260 -2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
6. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm).
7. Cold- Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch (1.37 -mm) bare steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch-
(12.7-mm-) wide flange, and in depth indicated. Clip Angle: 1 -1/2 by 1 -1/2 inch (38.1 by 38.1 mm),
0.068 -inch- (1.73 -mm -) thick, galvanized steel.
8. Hat - Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, in depth indicated. Minimum Base Metal Thickness:
0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).
9. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other
properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. G -P Gypsum Corporation.
2. National Gypsum Company.
3. Temple - Inland Forest Products Corp.
4. USG Corporation, Inc.
B. Panel Size, General: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and
correspond with support system indicated.
C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36.
1. Regular Type: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered.
2. Type X: In thickness indicated and with long edges tapered.
D. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard, at curved surfaces: ASTM C 36, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular -type panels of the same thickness, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, and with long
edges tapered. Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.
E. Sag- Resistant Gypsum Wallboard, at all ceiling surfaces: ASTM C 36, manufactured to have more sag resistance
than regular -type gypsum board, 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick, and with long edges tapered. Provide panels of 12 -foot
lengths.
F. Proprietary, Special Fire - Resistive Type: ASTM C 36, having improved fire resistance over standard Type X,
complying with requirements of fire- resistance -rated assemblies indicated, in thickness indicated, and with long
edges tapered.
1. G -P Gypsum Corporation; Type 5.
2. USG Corporation, Inc.; Firecode C.
G. Foil- Backed Gypsum Wallboard, at all exterior walls: ASTM C 36, with core type and in thickness indicated, and
with long edges tapered.
H. Tile Backing Panels:
1. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with core type and in thickness
indicated.
2. Product: G -P Gypsum Corp.; Dens - Shield Tile Backer.
I. Abuse - Resistant Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36, manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface
indentation and through - penetration than standard gypsum panels, with core type and in thickness indicated, and
with long edges tapered.
1. Products:
a. G -P Gypsum Corporation: ToughRock Abuse - Resistant Gypsum Board.
b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Hi -Abuse Wallboard.
c. USG Corporation, Inc.: SHEETROCK Brand Abuse - Resistant Gypsum Panels.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.
3. Expansion (Control) Joint: Use where indicated.
4. Curved -Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges; use at curved openings.
B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with profiles and designations indicated on Drawings,
provide products by one of the following:
a. Fry Reglet Corp.
b. Gordon, Inc.
c. MM Systems Corporation.
d. Pittcon Industries.
2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221
(ASTM B 221M), alloy 6063 -T5.
3. Finish: Corrosion- resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard over Metal Studs: Paper or fiberglass as needed.
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other
compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
I. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting -type taping compound.
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, flanges of trim accessories, and
fasteners, use setting -type taping compound.
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound.
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all- purpose compound.
D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panel as recommended by
manufacturer.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written
recommendations.
B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant complying
with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in
building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Available Products:
a. Pecora Corp.; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.
b. USG Corporation, Inc.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
09260 -4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
D. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Foam Gasket: Adhesive - backed, closed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
E. Sound Attenuation Blankets:
1. ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins
with mineral fibers manufactured from slag wool, or rock wool.
2. Fire- Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NON - LOAD - BEARING STEEL FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation.
B. Suspended Ceiling Framing:
1. Suspend ceiling hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum
that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required
to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere
with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental
suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced
standards.
3. Attach hangers to structural members. Do not support ceilings from or attach hangers to permanent metal
forms, steel deck tabs, steel roof decks, ducts, pipes, or conduit.
4. Wire -tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies indicated.
5. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical
surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross - furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into
wall track.
C. Partition Framing:
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and wall.
2. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except
where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing over frames for doors
and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum
board.
3. Frame door openings to comply with GA -600 and with gypsum board manufacturer's applicable written
recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of floor or roof structure
above.
4. Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise
indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
3.2 PANEL PRODUCT INSTALLATION
A. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C 840 and GA -216.
1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches (304.8 mm) o.c. for vertical applications.
2. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches (203.2 mm) o.c.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09260 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3. On ceilings, apply sag- resistant gypsum panels before wall /partition board application to the greatest extent
possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Single -Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.
5. Multilayer Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.
6. Laminating to Substrate: Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and
temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.
B. Tile Backing Panels (Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panel): Install with 1/4 -inch (6.4 -mm) gap where
panels abut other construction or penetrations.
3.3 FINISHING
A. Installing Trim Accessories: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Finishing Gypsum Board Panels: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints,
penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for
decoration.
1. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.
3. Glass -Mat, Water- Resistant Backing Panels: Do not use paper tape and joint compound. Finish according
to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below, according to ASTM C 840, for locations
indicated:
1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a
higher level of finish is required for fire- resistance -rated assemblies and sound -rated assemblies.
2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges
where panels are substrate for tile and where indicated.
3. Level 3: Embed tape and apply separate first and fill coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim
flanges at surfaces receiving medium- or heavy - textured finishes before painting or heavy wallcoverings.
4. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and
trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view,where indicated.
5. Level 5: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and
trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface, on all panel surfaces that will be
exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.
END OF SECTION 09260
09260 -6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed wall tile.
3. Crack - suppression membrane for thin -set tile installations.
4. Joint sealants installed as part of tile installations.
5. Grout sealer and temporary protective coating installed as part of tile installations.
6. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
C. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for tile backing panels.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as
determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of
expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers
specified.
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for
Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.
B. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile, T420, T425: Factory- mounted flat tile as follows:
1. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain.
2. Module Sizes: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
CERAMIC TILE 09310 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3. Thickness: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
4. Face: Plain with cushion edges.
5. Mounting:
a. Resin dot tile sheets.
b. Factory mount sheets to include patterns where indicated in Drawings.
6. Product: As indicated in schedule on Drawings.
C. Glazed Wall Tile T6: Flat tile as follows:
1. Module Size: As indicated by Manufacturer's designation.
2. Thickness: 3/8 inch (9.5 mm).
3. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with manufacturer's standard edges.
4. Mounting: Factory back - mounted.
5. Product: As indicated in schedule on Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Crack - Suppression Membranes for Thin -Set Tile Installations: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with
ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.
1. Polyethylene -Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing, 0.008 -inch (0.203 -mm)
nominal thickness.
a. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.
2. Fabric - Reinforced, Fluid - Applied Product: Liquid -latex rubber with fabric reinforcement.
a. Products:
1) Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti - Fracture Membrane.
2) LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
3) MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19.
2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Custom Building Products.
2. LATICRETE International Inc.
3. MAPEI Corporation.
B. Source Limitations: For each tile installation, obtain compatible formulations of setting and grouting materials
containing latex or latex additives from a single manufacturer.
C. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.
1. Prepackaged dry- mortar mix combined with liquid -latex additive.
2. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar.
D. Polymer - Modified Tile Grout: ANSI Al 18.7.
1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Colors: As indicated in Finish Schedule in Drawings.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Elastomeric Sealants: Elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with
applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
1. One -Part, Mildew- Resistant Silicone Sealant.
2. Multipart, Self - Leveling Urethane Sealant.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement -based formulation provided
or approved by manufacturer of tile- setting materials.
09310 -2 CERAMIC TILE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, half -hard brass or stainless steel (ASTM A 666, 300 Series) exposed -edge
material.
D. Grout Sealer and Temporary Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints
that does not change color or appearance of grout.
1. Miracle Sealants Company: 511 Impregnator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are
incompatible with tile- setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
E. Field- Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from
staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating,
taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile
installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without
interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without
disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.
Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures,
and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on
each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Locate tile patterns as indicated in Drawings. If not indicated, center pattern in both directions in each space.
F. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.
G. Movement Joints: Locate movement joints and other sealant - filled joints during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
CERAMIC TILE 09310 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
H. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
I. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI Al 18.10 and membrane manufacturer's written instructions
for full floor coverage.
J. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95
percent mortar coverage.
1. Tile floors in wet areas.
2. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
3. Tile floors composed of rib - backed tiles.
K. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Paver Tiles: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
L. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other
flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
M. Install tile on walls with the following joint widths:
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
2. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
3. Vitreous Glass Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).
N. Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout - sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As
soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by
wiping with soft cloth.
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior floor installation on crack - suppression membrane over concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA F122.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex - portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified unsanded grout.
B. Large Format Tile: For tiles larger than 12 inches in any one dimension, provide interior floor installation on crack -
suppression membrane over concrete; medium -bed mortar; TCA F122, except that mortar is applied with a 1/4 inch
notched trowel.
1. Medium -Bed Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified unsanded grout.
3.4 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior wall installation over masonry or concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA W202.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex - portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified unsanded grout.
B. Interior wall installation; thin -set mortar; over gypsum board; TCA W243.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified unsanded grout.
C. Interior wall installation over glass -mat, water - resistant backer board; thin -set mortar; TCA W245.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified unsanded grout.
D. Interior wall installation of vitreous glass tile over glass -mat, water- resistant backer board; thin -set mortar;
TCA W245.
093104 CERAMIC TILE
• '
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTONSQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
1. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
a; Apply mortar with 3/16"x5/32" V-notched trowel as recommended in writing by tile manufacturer.
2. Grout: Polymer-Modified sanded grout.
END OF SECTION 09310
•
•
CERAMIC TILE 09310-5
01/16/09 - GAP, INC:
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
• T
•
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
09310-6 •• • CER'AMI&TILE"
_ -
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/ TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09401 - CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes thinset, precast cementitious terrazzo tiles. •
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and .modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For terrazzo installed on walkway surfaces, provide finished installation products
with the following values as determined by testing identical installations and products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
2. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of terrazzo and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include terrazzo fabrication and installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections,
component details, and attachments to other Work.
C. Qualification Data: For Installer.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
• A. Installer Qualifications: An•installer who is a contractor member of NTMA.
B. NTMA Standards: Comply with NTMA Guide Specification and ' recommendations for terrazzo type
• indicated unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during
terrazzo installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO T85
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, as indicated in
Finish Schedule:
1. T85: Innovative Stone.
B. Precast Terrazzo Units: Comply with NTMA's written recommendations for fabricating precast cementitious
terrazzo units in sizes and profiles indicated . Reinforce, units as required by unit sizes, profiles, and thicknesses and
as recommended by manufacturer.
CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO 09401 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1. Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Crack - Suppression Membranes for Thin -Set Tile Installations: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with
ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.
1. Polyethylene -Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing, 0.008 -inch (0.203 -mm)
nominal thickness.
a. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.
2. Fabric - Reinforced, Fluid - Applied Product: Liquid -latex rubber with fabric reinforcement.
a. Products:
1) Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti - Fracture Membrane.
2) LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
3) MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19..
2.03 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: MAPEI Corporation.
B. Source Limitations: For each tile installation, obtain compatible formulations of setting and grouting materials
containing latex or latex additives from a single manufacturer.
C. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. Prepackaged dry- mortar mix combined with liquid -latex
additive.
D. Polymer- Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A 1 18.7.
1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement -based formulation provided
or approved by manufacturer of tile- setting materials and as specified in Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor
Topping ".
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, half -hard brass or stainless steel (ASTM A 666, 300 Series) exposed -edge
material.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or
appearance of grout.
D. Joint Sealants: Recommended by terrazzo and sealant manufacturers and complying with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and
recommended by cleaner manufacturer for use on terrazzo type indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove dust and any coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax. oil, or
silicone, that are incompatible with tile- setting materials.
09401 -2 CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile
installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without
interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without
disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.
Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures,
and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on
each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Movement Joints: Locate movement joints and other sealant - filled joints during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A118.10 and membrane manufacturer's written instructions
for full floor coverage.
I. For installations indicated below, follow procedures for back - buttering tile in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
1. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
J. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths:
1. Precast Cementitious Terrazzo Tile: 1/16 inch (3 mm).
K. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other
flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
L. Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout- sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As
soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by
wiping with soft cloth.
CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO 09401 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3.03 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior floor installation on crack - suppression membrane over concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA F122.
1. Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified sanded grout.
END OF SECTION 09401
09401 -4 CEMENTITIOUS TERRAZZO
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09402 - RESINOUS TERRAZZO TILE
• PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes thin -set, precast resinous terrazzo tiles in horizontal (floor) and vertical applications.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification - to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For terrazzo installed on walkway surfaces, provide finished installation products
with the following values as determined by testing identical installations- and products per ASTM C 1028:
1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6.
2. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
B. Structural Performance for Vertical applications:
1. Provide resinous terrazzo tile system capable of withstanding the effects of gravity Toads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures indicated on Drawings.
C. Seismic Performance: Provide resinous terrazzo tile system capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake
motions determined according to Section 1610 of the BOCA National Building Code.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of terrazzo and accessory indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Include. terrazzo fabrication and installation requirements. Include plans, elevations, sections,
component details, and attachments to other Work.
C: Samples: For each type, color, and pattern of terrazzo and accessory required and in size indicated, below:
1. Precast Resinous Terrazzo: 4 -inch- (100 -mm -) square Samples.
2. Accessories: 6 -inch- (150 -mm -) long Samples of each exposed strip item required.
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.
E. Material certificates.
F. Test reports.
G. Maintenance data.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. A qualified installer • (applicator) who is acceptable to resinous terrazzo tile manufacturer to install
•
manufacturer's products.
2. Engage an installer who is certified in writing, by terrazzo tile manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's
•
RESINOUS TERRAZZO TILE 09402 -1
' L
+ �
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
products.
B. NTMA Standard: Comply with NTMA Guide Specification and written recommendations for terrazzo type
indicated, unless more stringent requirements are specified.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lighting conditions during
terrazzo installation.
B. Cold- Weather Requirements:
1. Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates.
Comply with cold - weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602.
2. Cold- Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and
above and will remain so until masonry has dried.
C. Hot - Weather Requirements: Comply with hot - weather construction requirements contained in
ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 PRECAST EPDXY TERRAZZO T64
A. Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Quarella DIAMAstone Composite
Quartz as manufactured /distributed by Stone Marketing and Design Services, Inc.
B. Precast Epoxy Terrazzo Tiles:
1. 1/2 inch (12 mm) thick; face dimension as indicated in Drawings.
2. Color and Pattern: As indicated by Manufacturer's designations.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Crack - Suppression Membranes for Thin -Set Tile Installations: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with
ANSI A118.10, selected from the following.
1. Polyethylene -Sheet Product: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing, 0.008 -inch (0.203 -mm)
nominal thickness.
a. Product: Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.
2. Fabric - Reinforced, Fluid- Applied Product: Liquid -latex rubber with fabric reinforcement.
a. Products:
1) Custom Building Products; Trowel & Seal Waterproofing and Anti - Fracture Membrane.
2) LATICRETE International Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane.
3) MAPEI Corporation; PRP M19.
2.03 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers: MAPEI Corporation.
B. Source Limitations: For each tile installation, obtain compatible formulations of setting and grouting materials
containing latex or latex additives from a single manufacturer.
C. Latex - Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set):
1. ANSI A118.4.
2. Prepackaged dry- mortar mix combined with liquid -latex additive.
09402 -2 RESINOUS TERRAZZO TILE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
D. Polymer - Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.
1. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.
2. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, portland cement -based formulation provided
or approved by manufacturer of tile- setting materials and as specified in Division 3 Section "Concrete Floor
Topping ".
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L- shape, half -hard brass or stainless steel (ASTM A 666, 300 Series) exposed -edge
material.
C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or
appearance of grout.
D. Joint Sealants: Recommended by terrazzo and sealant manufacturers and complying with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Cleaner: Chemically neutral cleaner with pH factor between 7 and 10 that is biodegradable, phosphate free, and
recommended by cleaner manufacturer for use on terrazzo type indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Remove dust and any coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or
silicone, that are incompatible with tile- setting materials.
B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile- setting material
manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
D. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, use factory blended tile or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of
Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile
installation schedules.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation
methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without
interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without
disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces.
Grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built -in items. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures,
and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
RESINOUS TERRAZZO TILE 09402 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,
base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on
each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Movement Joints: Locate movement joints and other sealant - filled joints during installation of setting materials,
mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of ANSI A108.10, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A118.10 and membrane manufacturer's written instructions
for full floor coverage.
I. For installations indicated below, follow procedures for back - buttering tile in ANSI A108 Series tile installation
standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.
1. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger.
J. Install tile on floors with the following joint widths for Precast Resinous Terrazzo Tile: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).
K. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other
flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
L. Apply grout sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to grout - sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As
soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by
wiping with soft cloth.
3.03 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Interior floor installation on crack - suppression membrane over concrete; thin -set mortar; TCA F122.
I . Thin -Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar.
2. Grout: Polymer - modified sanded grout.
END OF SECTION 09402
09402 -4 RESINOUS TERRAZZO TILE
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes new acoustical panels in existing exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling- mounted items. Show the
following:
1. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Ceiling- mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and
special moldings.
4. Modifications of existing suspension system to accommodate new acoustical panels.
C. Maintenance data.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP- accredited laboratory.
B. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following:
1. ASTM E 580.
2. CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings -- Seismic Zones 0 -2."
3. CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies -- Seismic
Zones 3 & 4."
4. UBC Standard 25 -2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. Heavy Duty
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Power - Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated
from corrosion- resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated,
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc - coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct
Hung ") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch- (2.69 -mm -) diameter wire.
E. Rod Hangers: ASTM A 510 (ASTM A 510M), mild carbon steel.
1. Diameter: 1/4 -inch (6.34 -mm).
2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 153/A I53M, hot -dip galvanized.
F. Seismic struts and seismic clips.
G. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings
for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet
metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.
2.03 ACOUSTICAL PANELS AT3
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in Finish Schedule.
B. Manufacturer: Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
C. Classification: Type: III, Form: 2, Pattern: C E.
D. Color: White.
E. LR: Not less than 0.85.
F. NRC: Not Tess than 0.55, Type E -400 mounting per ASTM E 795.
G. Edge Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation in Finish Schedule.
H. Thickness: 5/8 inch (22 mm), as indicated by manufacturer's designation in Finish Schedule.
I. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).
2.04 ACOUSTICAL PANELS AT5 — NOT USED
2.05 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following.
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL.
2. USG Corporation; Donn DX.
B. Components:
1. Provide components necessary for a complete installation of specified acoustical panel ceiling, complying with
the requirements below and applicable building codes.
2. Suspension system shall be composed of products of a single manufacturer. Comply with single- source
09511-2 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
suspension system instructions in Finish Schedule.
C. Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold - rolled steel sheet, prepainted,
electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90)
coating designation, with prefinished 15/16 -inch- (24 -mm -) wide flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system, except where heavy -duty is required by code.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type.
3. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold - rolled sheet.
4. Flange Finish: Painted white.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and building codes and seismic requirements
indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
1. At existing ceiling systems, remove and add components as necessary to provide system complying with
requirements.
B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of
each ceiling. Avoid using less- than - half -width tiles at borders.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other
objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire- resistance -rated
ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally
effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that
interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices.
1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.
2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck.
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to
conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate with concealed fasteners at intervals not
more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension
system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.
E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace
dented, bent, or kinked members.
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge
moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.
END OF SECTION 09511
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
•
•
• .
09511-4 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09612 - CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes sealing compound for concrete floors in back -of -house spaces.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, application instructions, and general recommendations.
Include data substantiating that products to be furnished comply with requirements of the contract documents.
B. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's instructions for proper maintenance materials and procedures.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not proceed with installation until areas to receive the work have been enclosed
and until temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained within values established by
the manufacturer for optimum quality control.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SEALING COMPOUND
A. Water -Based Acrylic V.O.C. Compliant Seal:
1. Product: American Formulating & Manufacturing; Safecoat Mexeseal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which concrete floor sealer will be performed for compliance with
requirements for application of flooring materials. Do not proceed with application until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected. Start of any of the concrete floor sealer work will be considered the Applicator's acceptance of
the existing floor and site environmental conditions.
B. All installation steps must be performed in the order specified. Any deviations must be pre- approved, in writing, by
the Manufacturer's representative and the GAP Construction Manager.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Prepare concrete surfaces as follows:
1. Shotblast and grind concrete as required to obtain optimum bond of flooring to concrete. Remove sufficient
sub -floor material to provide a sound surface, free of Iaitance, glaze, efflorescence, mastic, gypsum patch or any
other bond - breaking materials. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete to acceptable condition using only
approved products.
2. Surface should be smooth and free of unwanted ridges formed by either mastic, concrete or other materials.
CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER 09612 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
3. Non - destructive mechanical scraping and/or grinding is the preferred method of contaminant removal.
3.03 SURFACE REPAIR
A. Fill all holes, spalling, cracks, voids and joints as recommended by system Manufacturer with minimal or no residue
on surrounding surfaces and as required to provide smooth, level and even substrate.
I. All individual spalls approximately the size of a quarter (7/8 inch in diameter) and up to 3 inches in diameter,
1/16 inch deep or more, should be filled neatly and level with the surrounding surfaces using the crack, spalling
and joint filler specified above.
2. All spalling larger than 3 inches in diameter or areas requiring leveling should be filled neatly and level with
surrounding surfaces using approved self - leveling, self - drying cementitous material as specified in Section
03352. All terminations for large pours should be straight and keyed -in to eliminate lips or trip hazards.
3. All cracks approximately the width of a nickel and larger must be filled neatly and level with surrounding
surfaces using the crack, spalling and joint filler specified above.
4. All construction joints must be taped off and filled neatly and level with surrounding surfaces using the crack,
spalling and joint filler specified above.
3.04 SHOTBLASTING
A. Shotblast floor, using 15 -inch or larger machine, at machine speed of 40 to 60 feel per minute using S170 and S230
shot size with light brush -blast or surface preparation method as follows and as required to create suitable bonding
surface for concrete sealer. The clean porous surface should have a light profile with abraded roughness of medium -
grit sandpaper.
1. Verify that floor is contaminant -free and leveling materials are cured and floor is swept clean prior to shotblast.
2. Varying shotblast techniques may be required to ensure maximum uniformity between concrete and
cementitous, self - leveling topped surfaces.
3. Shotblast machine is to run parallel to storefront entry doors, in straight, even lines unless specified otherwise.
4. Provide consistent light abrasion of concrete slab surface, including surfaces required, free of streaks and lines,
by shotblasting process; minimize overlap markings; at no time shall shotblasting take place during machine
turns.
5. After shotblasting is complete and equipment is removed, the floor shall be swept magnetically to remove steel
shot and followed by a fine bristled push broom. After sweeping, vacuum entire floor to remove remaining
dust, shot and debris.
6. Shotblasting subcontractor shall be responsible for the removal and disposal of all debris created by shotblasting
or other surface preparation methods.
7. Maintain slab free of all traffic and trades between shotblasting and application of concrete floor sealer.
3.05 APPLICATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or
specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory
performance of the work.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. General: Institute protective procedures and install protective materials as required to ensure that work of this
section will be without damage or deterioration at substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 09612
09612 -2 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09640 —WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. The installation of Solid wood flooring over existing 3/8 inch Engineered wood that has been glued down. This
store is below grade.
2. Plywood sub - flooring.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. National Wood Flooring Association (NWFA)
B. National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (NOFMA)
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Wood Floor Checklist and Permanent Job Record: refer to project bid instructions.
B. Written Warranty: from installation contractor; shall cover all materials and chemicals used for a period of one year
and installation for a minimum period of two years from the date of substantial completion.
C. Qualification Data: Copy of current, valid wood flooring contractor license for the same state /jurisdiction as the
project.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Minimum of 5 years experience in the installation and finishing of hardwood strip flooring with projects similar
to the work of this Contract.
2. Use only skilled and experienced wood flooring installers for preparation of substrate and actual installation of
hardwood flooring.
3. Helpers and apprentices used for such work shall be under full and constant supervision at all times by
thoroughly skilled hardwood flooring installers.
4. In the acceptance or rejection of installed wood flooring, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part
of installers.
5. Documentation of the Qualifications to be part of the job file.
6. Installer must have a current and valid contractor license in good standing.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of material and product from one source with resources to provide materials
and products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.
WOOD FLOORING 09640 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver wood flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. Ship flooring directly from the manufacturer's
climate controlled warehouse and certified by the manufacturer to contain ideal moisture content at time of shipment
to the installation site.
B. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture during delivery and handling. Do not deliver wood flooring until
concrete, masonry, plaster, ceramic tile, and similar wet work is complete and dry.
C. Wood should NOT be stored. If extended storage is required due to unforeseen circumstances, contact the CPM and
Gap Inc Preferred Wood Flooring Consultant for further direction.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. Existing Engineered Wood: Has 16.4 to 7.5% moisture content.
2. New Plywood: moisture content to be 8 to 12 %
3. New Strip wood: moisture content, to be 7 to 9%
4. Site acclimation 30 to 70% Humidity, Temperature 50 to 80 degrees
5. Existing floor has severe undulations.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Wood Flooring: Equal to 1 percent of amount installed for each type and finish indicated.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD STRIP FLOORING
A. Provide wood floor as follows:
1. Species: as scheduled in project drawings
2. Size: 3/4" x 5 "" x length min. 17.5" and max. 86.6
3. Cut: Plain Sawn.
4. Grade: as scheduled in project drawings. Grade is "active"
5. Matching: Tongue and groove, and end matched with 4 sided eased edge
6. Backs: Channeled hollow back. Hollow back must be properly aligned for fastener penetration.
7. Moisture Content: Average moisture content at start of acclimation period per section 3.1.B.1
8. Factory Finish: UV Cured with aluminum oxide, stain and sheen matched to control samples.
9. Color: as scheduled in project drawings.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Felt Paper: 15 lb. asphalt saturated felt paper that meets ASTM D4869.
B. Felt Paper Adhesive: Pure Stick #84, Pure Asphalt (773- 247 - 7030).
C. Plywood Underlayment: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine, 3/4" thick, CDX grade plywood sheathing with exterior glue.
Moisture content per section 3.1.B.3. Fire treated as required by local jurisdiction.
D. Fasteners: For Solid Wood Flooring: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that recommended in
NWFA's "Hardwood Flooring Installation Guidelines." Use 1 -1/2" maximum length nails to avoid puncturing vapor
barrier.
09640 -2 WOOD FLOORING
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
E. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork strip complying with FS HH -C -576, Type I -B, Class 2.
F. Wood Trim: In same species and grade as wood flooring, unless otherwise indicated in project drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditioning:
1. Storefront must be installed and HVAC must be operating for 72 hours prior to delivery of wood floor and
installation of "slab Moisture Vapor Protection.
2. Maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building occupants for acclimation period,
during installation and after installation of wood floor.
3. Ambient temperature to be between 65 and 75 degrees Fahrenheit. Slab temperature must not be below 55
degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Where relative humidity falls below 35% or above 60 %, contact CPM and Gap Inc Preferred Wood Flooring
Consultant for further direction.
B. Acclimation Period:
1. Test wood for moisture content upon arrival on -site using a electronic impedance moisture encounter meter (i.e.
Tramex, Delmhorst,- or Mini Ligno). The wood flooring should arrive on -site with a moisture content of 6% -
9%. In the event that flooring arrives at higher or lower moisture content, contact wood floor manufacturer and
allow more time for acclimation
2. Does not require acclimatization prior to installation, open boxes at time of installation and install immediately.
3. Wood must reach Equilibrium, Moisture Content between 6% and 9 %.
4. Plywood underlayment must be allowed to acclimate. Moisture content shall not exceed that of the finish wood
by more than 4 %, nor - exceed 13% in total content.
5. If site conditions and /or material conditions are not achieved when the floor is scheduled for installation.
• Contact CPM and Gap Inc Preferred Wood Flooring Consultant for further direction.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation
tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of wood flooring. Proceed with installation only after
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Review repair floor plan at end of section to locate areas of extreme slab undulation, requiring extreme flattening.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Sand Existing wood to greater degree of flatness to produce a maximum I/8 -inch (3 -mm) deviation in any direction
when checked with a 8 -foot (2.4m) straight edge.
1. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before product installation. •
3.4 INSTALLATION, STANDARD
A. Apply a full spread Felt Paper Adhesive.
B. Lay felt paper over the engineered wood and overlap seams 6 inches, fully seal seams closed, using felt paper
adhesive. Paper is to run perpendicular to the run of the Engineered •wood. Roll out all air bubbles, moderate
stapling.
C. Lay ,4 x 8 x 3 /4 inch plywood perpendicular to the run of the new strip wood and mechanically fasten it to the slab
(fastener to penetrate concrete '/a inch min.), leave 1/8 inch between each sheet, and ' inch between the plywood
and the vertical surfaces.
i„: WOOD FLOORING 09640 -3
P ,
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
D. Lay felt paper over the plywood and overlap seams 6 inches, seal seams closed using Duct Tape, and fasten in place.
Paper to run in the same direction as the plywood
E. Install Solid -Wood Strip Flooring. Blind nail or staple flooring to substrate with fasteners placed at 6" to 8"
intervals with no less than 2 fasteners per plank, not closer than 2" from end according to NOFMA's written
recommendations.
1. Pattern: Lay wood flooring in direction indicated on project drawings or, if not indicated, as directed by
Architect. Stagger end joints 6 inches minimum and avoid creating patterns.
2. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other obstructions and terminations of flooring of not
less than 1/2 inch (13 mm), unless otherwise indicated on project drawings.
3. Install boards tight together unless otherwise directed by CPM or Gap Inc Preferred Wood Flooring Consultant.
4. Leave a 1 /16th washer space every 10th row of boards.
5. Unless fully concealed by trim, fill expansion space with flush cork expansion strip.
6. Use of wood putty is limited to board end joints where needed. Putty should not be visible from a standing
position above area of putty.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Cover installed wood flooring to protect it from damage or deterioration during the remainder of construction
period. Use heavy kraft -paper or other suitable covering, tape all edges. Do not use plastic sheet or film that could
cause condensation.
1. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over kraft- paper- covered wood flooring. Protect flooring with
plywood or hardboard panels (Masonite or equal) to prevent damage from storing or moving objects over
flooring.
2. Provide mats at entrance doorways to minimize exposure to dirt and grit; vacuum with brush attachment
regularly; wipe up spills with a damp cloth.
3. Comply with wood floor manufacturer's instructions for removing spots, touching -up finish, recoating, and
repair of damaged floor finish.
END OF SECTION 09640
09640 -4 WOOD FLOORING
GAP, INC 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
Floor repair layout #2805 Washington Square, Tigard Oregon, December 22, 2008
+=
ill ik
♦— ■
CROWN
Dn 1/8
f ■
0
F
CASH WRAP I
T
T
I I
N
CROWN G
El _.
— 09640 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
I
09640 -6 WOOD FLOORING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall base.
2. Molding accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard size, but not less than 12 -by -12 -inch sections of each
different color and pattern of floor covering required.
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more
than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:
1. 48 hours before installation.
2. During installation.
3. 48 hours after installation.
B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than
55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C).
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll form and in full roll
width for each color, pattern, and type of sheet floor covering installed.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861, subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
. Allstate Rubber Corporation, Stoler Industries, Div.; Vulcanized SBR Rubber Base. and
2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; 1/8" Rubbermyte Wall Base Rubber Base.
3. Roppe Corporation; Type TS — Rubber Base.
B. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid).
D. Style: Cove (with top -set toe) at resilient and hard floor surfaces; Straight (toeless) at carpet.
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) .
F. Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
G. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches (1219 mm) long.
H. Outside Corners: Job formed.
I. Inside Corners: Job formed.
J. Surface: Smooth.
2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Typical Types: Carpet edge for glue -down applications; Nosing for carpet; Nosing for resilient floor covering;
Reducer strip for resilient floor covering; Joiner for tile and carpet.
1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products.
2. Roppe Corporation.
3. Stoler Industries, Div. Allstate Rubber Corporation.
B. Material: Rubber.
C. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesives: Water- resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions
indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
C. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in
advance of installation.
1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After
cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only
after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION
A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in
rooms and areas where base is required.
09653 -2 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with
horizontal and vertical substrates.
D. Do not stretch wall base during installation.
E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
F. Job - Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration
(whitening) at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to
length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall
base thickness.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form by cutting an inverted V- shaped
notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to
produce a snug fit to substrate.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of
each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor coverings that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.
3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.
a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and
placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09653
RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09653 -3
•
01/16/09, • - GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
, .
09653-4 RESILIENT WALCBASE AND ACCESSORIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Tufted broadloom carpet.
2. Carpet tile.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can
demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity."
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient
temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its
intended use.
C. Do not install carpet or carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with
adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by manufacturer.
D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet or carpet tile, install
carpet or carpet tile before installing these items.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Carpet Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace carpet or carpet tile that
does not comply with requirements or that fails within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty
does not include deterioration or failure of carpet or carpet tile from unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism,
or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags,
runs, and delamination.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Save unused carpet remnants and carpet tiles and deliver to store manager for future patching requirements.
CARPET 09680 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BROADLOOM CARPET
A. Products: As indicated in Drawings.
B. Color and Pattern: Custom color as indicated on Drawings.
C. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w /sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
D. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 KV, permanent conductive filament.
2.2 CARPET TILE
A. Products: As indicated in Drawings.
B. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Fiber Content: 100% Antron Brilliance continuous filament
D. Surface Pile Weight: 30 oz per square yard
E. Backing: 1/8" Polyurethane cushion back- NexStep
F. Size: As indicated in Drawings.
G. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 w /sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
H. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 KV, permanent conductive filament.
2.3 ANTI- FATIGUE CARPET TILE:
A. Products: Invigor Powerpoint, as distributed by Grand Entrance.
B. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Backing:
1. Rubber primary backing.
2. Anti - fatigue secondary backing.
D. Size: As indicated in Drawings.
2.4 POLYPROPYLENE CARPET TILE:
A. Products: Construction Specialties, Inc.; Powerpoint, as distributed by Grand Entrance.
B. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Fiber Content: 100% Polypropylene.
09680 -2 CARPET
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
D. Surface Pile Weight: 50 oz.
E. Backing: Rubber.
F. Size: As indicated in Drawings.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex - modified, hydraulic- cement -based formulation provided by
or recommended by the carpet manufacturer.
B. Carpet Adhesives: Water- resistant and nonstaining, high solids, low VOC emitting formulations that are
specifically recommended by the carpet manufacturer, as verified through compatibility and adhesion testing for
the intended substrate and application, and that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet:
1. Direct Glue -Down: Releasable type and complying with CRI 104, Section 8.
2. Carpet Tile With Spot Adhesive: Pressure - applied adhesive dots supplied with carpet tile.
3. Carpet Tile, Typical: Releasable type complying with CRI 104, Section 13.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Carpet: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue - Down."
B. Carpet Tiles:
1. Typical: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, "Carpet Modules (Tiles)."
2. Spot Adhesive: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing carpet tile with pressure - applied
adhesive dots.
C. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position.
Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.
D. Install pattern, if any, parallel to walls and borders.
END OF SECTION 09680
CARPET 09680 -3
OI/16/09 • - : - - GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
• • •
•
•
' •
•
•
'•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• :
. "
09680-4 CARPET
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09900 — PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and
surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. The work specified herein includes:
1. Repair and modification to an existing structure.
2. New work.
3. Coordination and scheduling of repairs, modifications and new work.
4. Matching, integration and connection of repairs, modifications and new work.
C. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted
or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard
colors and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding),
hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not
have a factory- applied final finish.
D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory- finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork.
b. Metal lockers.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
E. Related Sections include the following:
. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork.
4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames.
5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board.
PAINTING 09900 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section.
1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85- degree meter.
2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60- degree
meter.
3. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-
degree meter.
4. High gloss refers to a high -sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60- degree
meter.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers.
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross - reference
specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number
and general classification.
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and
instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.
B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on
representative Samples of the actual substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use
representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture
are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location
and application.
3. Submit 1 Sample on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only:
a. Painted Wood: 8 -inch- (200 -mm -) square Samples for each color and material on hardboard.
C. Qualification Data: For Applicator.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of
successful in- service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample for painting existing prefinished
metal, melamine or plastic laminate only. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of
approved sample Submittals.
1. Prepare and paint one 24 -inch length of columns or doorframes, or one 24 -inch square of doors or panels.
2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting
and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each
surface.
3. Adhesion Testing: In the presence of Architect or Owner, test adhesion of paint finishes to substrates, as
specified in ASTM D 3359.
a. Use Test Method A.
b. If two or more test sites are graded less than 4A, modify coating system as recommended by
manufacturer, provide new benchmark sample, and retest.
09900 -2 PAINTING
GAP. INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name and label and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type).
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well- ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature
of 45 deg F (7 deg C).
1. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and
90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C).
B. Apply solvent- thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45
and 95 deg F (7 and 35 deg C).
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures
less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
D. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within
temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the products listed in other Part 2 articles.
B. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are
used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Benjamin Moore).
2. Kelly Moore Paint Company, Inc. (Kelly Moore).
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one
another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
PAINTING 09900 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best - quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are
factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint - material containers not
displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.
2.3 INTERIOR PRIMERS
A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: Factory- formulated alkali- resistant acrylic -latex interior primer for interior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.028 mm).
B. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.028 mm).
a. Use white primer unless otherwise noted.
b. Use deep base, tinted 2 shades lighter than finish color, at deep colors.
C. Interior Gypsum Board Primer for Chalkboard Paint: Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior
application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Fresh Start Primer 023: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.028
mm).
D. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory- formulated latex -based primer for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.028 mm).
E. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic- Enamel Finishes: Factory- formulated alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based interior
wood primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer 253: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.028 mm).
F. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer: Factory- formulated quick- drying rust - inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; M29, DTM: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
G. Interior Zinc - Coated Metal Primer: Factory - formulated galvanized metal primer.
1. Benjamin Moore; IronClad Latex Low Lustre Metal and Wood Enamel No. 363: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm).
2.4 INTERIOR FINISH COATS
A. Interior Chalkboard Paint: Factory- formulated flat acrylic- emulsion latex paint for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Chalkboard 307: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
B. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory- formulated flat acrylic - emulsion latex paint for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Flat 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2
mils (0.030 mm).
C. Interior Low- Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory- formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not
less than 1.3 mils (0.033 mm).
09900 -4 PAINTING
GAP. INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUAREI TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
D. Interior Low- Luster Acrylic Paint for Siding: Factory - formulated low -sheen (eggshell) acrylic paint for exterior
application.
1. Kelly Moore; 1686 Dura -poxy Plus: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils (0.043 mm).
E. Interior Semigloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory - formulated semigloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application;
product as indicated in Finish Schedule.
1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -gloss Enamel 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of
not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).
2. Benjamin Moore; Low Lustre Waterborne Satin Impervo 314: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less
than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm).
3. Benjamin Moore; K &B Latex Satin 322: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.1 mils (0.028
mm).
F. Interior High -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory - formulated high -gloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application.
1. Benjamin Moore; Impervex® 309 Latex High Gloss Metal & Wood Enamel: Applied at a dry film
thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint
application.
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces
receiving paint are thoroughly dry.
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular
area.
B. Coordination of Work:
1. Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various
substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of
compatible primers.
2. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by
others.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items
already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or
weight of the item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
2. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in
the trades involved.
B. Cleaning:
1. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of
the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning.
2. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on
wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for
each particular substrate condition and as specified.
PAINTING 09900 -5
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime.
2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral- fiber-
reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and
release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve
curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast - cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces
are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before
application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
written instructions.
c. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching
cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to
dry, and vacuum before painting.
3. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and
sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other
recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in
finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces,
undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
c. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction
occurs on back side.
d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer
immediately on delivery.
4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil,
grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods
that comply with SSPC's recommendations.
a. Touch up bare areas and shop - applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with
solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat.
5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum -based solvents so surface is free of oil
and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by
mechanical methods.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material
before using.
3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same
material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in
shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited
for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules.
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation
of a durable paint film.
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
09900 -6 PAINTING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built -in fixtures, grilles, convector
covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these
areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection.
5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final
installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat
only.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or
grilles.
7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for
painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not
apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is
required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between
applications.
2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted.
3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint
film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners,
crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint
has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and
until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or
item being painted.
2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for
material and texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for
material and texture required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate
to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by
manufacturer.
E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in
equipment rooms and occupied spaces.
F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Uninsulated metal piping.
2. Uninsulated plastic piping.
3. Pipe hangers and supports.
4. Tanks that do not have factory - applied final finishes.
5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets.
6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material.
7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory - primed finish for field painting.
G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Switchgear.
2. Panelboards.
3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory - primed finish for field painting.
PAINTING 09900 -7
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that
is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no
burn - through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of
uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags,
ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work
not complying with requirements.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup:
1. At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from
Project site.
2. After completing painting, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing
and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by
cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work.
I. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply
with procedures specified in PDCA P1.
3.6 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete and Masonry (Other Than Concrete Unit Masonry): Provide the following paint systems over interior
concrete and brick masonry substrates:
1. Low - Luster Acrylic- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low- luster acrylic enamel.
2. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior concrete and masonry primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
B. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces:
1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint.
2. Low- Luster Acrylic- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior low- luster acrylic enamel.
3. Low- Luster Acrylic - Enamel Finish for Previously Painted Gypsum Board: Two spray - applied finish coats.
a. Finish Coats: Interior low- luster acrylic enamel.
4. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer compatible with finish coats.
09900 -8 PAINTING
,, -
I GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR : STORE #2805
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel, product indicated in finish schedule.
F_ 5. Chalkboard Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer for chalkboard finish.
b. Finish, Coats: Chalkboard paint.
C. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces:
1. Semigloss Acrylic- Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater.
a. Primer: Interior wood primer for acrylic- enamel and semigloss alkyd - enamel finishes.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
2. Interior Wood Siding Finish: Two finish coats. •
a. Sheen, effect and color to match Architect's sample.
D. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal:
1. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior ferrous -metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
E. Zinc - Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc- coated metal surfaces:
I. Semigloss Acrylic - Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Primer: Interior zinc- coated metal primer.
b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel.
END OF SECTION 09900
• - PAINTING 09900 -9.
•
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
09900 -10 PAINTING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09960 — HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces with Water -based
two- component polyurethane- fortified paint finish system.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and
surface treatment specified in other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or
is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors
and finishes available.
1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers,
exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory -
applied final finish.
C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.
1. Prefinished items include the following factory - finished components:
a. Architectural woodwork.
1) Where indicated, paint existing melamine or plastic laminate woodwork.
b. Metal lockers.
c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
d. Light fixtures.
2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces:
a. Furred areas.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Duct shafts.
3. Finished metal surfaces include the following:
a. Anodized aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
c. Chromium plate.
4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code - required labels or equipment name, identification,
performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel.
2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal.
3. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork.
4. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames.
5. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for surface preparation of gypsum board.
1.2 PERFORMANCE
A. VOC: Coatings shall have less than 150 g/L of volatile organic compounds.
B. Fire Rating: Coatings shall be Type I or Class A fire rated. ASTM E- 84 -91a
C. Scrub Test: >2,800 cycles. ASTM D2486
D. Impact Resistance: >60 in/Ibs. ASTM D2794
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
E. Chemical Resistance: "10" (test maximum) for all chemicals tested. ASTM D1308
F. Finish: 10 -15% gloss at 60°
G. Stain Removal: "8 " - "10" (test maximum) for all stains tested. Four -hour Open Spot Test
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.
B. Finish Samples: Submit three samples of any non - standard color:
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in unopened containers with manufacturer's labels intact.
B. Protect materials from freezing.
C. Store between 50° and 80° F.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only under the following conditions:
1. Air temperature: Between 50° and 80° F. Relative humidity: less than 50 %.
2. Prevent wide temperature fluctuations that could cause moisture condensation on freshly coated surfaces.
3. Application areas free of excessive dust.
4. Lighting: Maintain minimum 80 foot candles on surfaces to be coated.
5. Provide adequate fresh air and ventilation during application.
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A. Extra Stock: Provide one gallon of each base coat color used. Provide in sealed, labeled containers.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Master Coating Technologies (MCT). Telephone: (800) 898 -0219. Fax: (612) 722 -8853.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Primer: Provide primer recommended by manufacturer for substrate.
1. Refer to Part 3 — Execution, 3.2 Preperation.
B. Finish System Components:
1. Scuffmaster ScrubTough water -based two- component polyurethane - fortified coating and cross - linker.
2. Miscellaneous Materials: Surface patching compounds and other materials necessary for application of finish
system shall be of high quality and compatible with coating system.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Spray or roll primers and base coats in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
09960 -2 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
��`•,: _ GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
PART 3 - EXECUTION
li
, 3.1 EXAMINATION
t
A. Verify that substrates are ready to receive work of this Section and are in a condition that is in accordance with
manufacturer's requirements.
B. Beginning application of materials signifies acceptance of substrates.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protection: Mask adjacent surfaces to protect from over - spray. Protect floors and other surfaces with drop cloths.
B. Remove items which are not to be coated from surfaces that are to be coated. Tag and protect removed items and
store until reinstallation. Reinstall items after completion of coating application. Items which are not to be coated
include: Operating Hardware, Electrical Device Plates and Factory Finished Items.
C. Patch and repair substrates as specified in applicable Specifications Sections. Clean substrates: remove dirt, grit,
loose materials, grease, oil, temporary protective coatings, contamination, other foreign materials. Sand with 100
grit or finer sand paper, spackle, putty and caulk existing surfaces to •produce smooth and uniform substrates. Spot -
prime all existing water - soluble stains with alcohol or oil -based stain killing primer. Touch -up painted or primed
surfaces with compatible paint or specified primer.
D. Concrete: Remove high spots, fill holes and clean surfaces as specified in Section 03200. Allow new concrete - to
cure a minimum of 28 days prior to application of coatings.
E. Masonry: Tool joints and clean surfaces as specified in Section 04200. Rinse off cleaning solutions and allow
surface to dry. Allow new mortar to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to coating.
F. Ferrous Metals: Remove rust and mill scale. Wire brush or sand damaged or rusted areas to bright metal. Remove •
grease and other foreign materials with mineral spirits. Touch -up damaged areas of shop primer.
•
G. Aluminum: Thoroughly degrease using non - hydrocarbon solvent cleaner. Etching is recommended before priming
if possible. As an alternative, use a wash primer prior to the paint application.
H. Non - Ferrous Metals: Clean with lacquer thinner.
I. Wood: Sand smooth and free of marks as specified in Section 06200. Wash sap spots and knots with mineral
spirits. When dry, cover spots and knots with two coats of shellac.
J. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure a minimum of 28 days prior to coating.
K. Gypsum Wallboard: Apply joint tape and compound to joints, fastener, heads, dents and surface flaws as specified
in Section 09250. Sand smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Thoroughly clean sanded areas of dust with a clean
damp rag.
L. Ceramic Tile and Glazed Block: Thoroughly clean off oil, wax, grease and other residues. De -gloss with either
mechanical abrasion or chemical etch. Remove sanding dust with a clean, wet rag.
M. Vinyl Wallcovering: Contact MCT at (800) 898 -0219.
N. Previously painted Surfaces: De -gloss (if necessary) and re -prime all previously painted substrates with primer
scheduled at the end of Part '3. • -
', HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -3.
• f
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
O. Laminate: Scuff -sand to increase adhesion. Use fine grit sandpaper (220 or finer). Prime using primer scheduled at
the end of Part 3
P. Metal: Scuff -sand to increase adhesion. Use fine grit sandpaper (220 or finer). Prime using primer scheduled at the
end of Part 3.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Applicator to apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Closets and storage areas shall be finished inside in the same manner as adjoining rooms.
B. Primers: Apply as many coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. Allow to dry prior to application of subsequent coats.
C. Re -prime suction and hot spots on substrate prior to applying base coatings.
D. Primers: Apply as many coats as necessary to produce a uniform substrate appearance. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended coverage rate. Allow to dry prior to application of subsequent coats.
E. Re -prime suction and hot spots on substrate prior to applying base coatings.
F. Sand: Over wood and gypsum board, sand primer with 100 grit or finer sand paper. Thoroughly remove dust from
sanding with a clean, wet rag.
G. Finish: Spray or roll to completely cover primer and according to manufacturer's printed instructions. Apply in a
continuous, even film at manufacturer's specified coverage rate.
H. Apply each coat to a natural break point such as an edge or corner without stopping.
I. Finishes shall match approved benchmark samples and shall be free of runs, sags, holidays and excessive
irregularity /unevenness of pattern coat. Transitions between colors and /or other materials shall be sharp, clean and
without overlaps.
3.4 INSPECTION
A. Request acceptance of each coat before applying succeeding coats.
B. Touch up and repair unacceptable work.
C. Protect finished areas from damage.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean over spray and spills. Remove masking.
B. Repair damage to coatings and surfaces caused by clean -up activities.
3.6 COATING SCHEDULE
A. Scheduled number of coats is in addition to surface preparation specified above.
B. Substrate Type: Gypsum Board (New or existing):
1. Primer: Scuffmaster Primemaster Hi -Hide Primer/ Sealer
2. Coating: Scuffmaster ScrubTough polyurethane- fortified eggshell coating with crosslinker.
09960 -4 HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Substrate Type: Laminate and Painted Metal:
1. Primer: Scuffmaster Primemaster Bonding Primer
2. Coating: Scuffmaster ScrubTough polyurethane - fortified eggshell coating with crosslinker.
D. Substrate Type: Wood:
1. Primer: Stainblocking Primer
2. Coating: Scuffmaster ScrubTough polyurethane - fortified eggshell coating with crosslinker.
END OF SECTION
HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09960 -5
- • .-
01/16/09 GAP, INC:
WASHINGTON:SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
. ,
Page left intentionally blank •
. ,
•
. ,
„.••
09960-6 HIGH PERFORM ANCE COATINGS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 09961 - HIGH -GLOSS COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and shop application of high -gloss coating systems on the
following substrates:
1. Exterior and interior aluminum.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of coating system and in each color and gloss of finish coat
indicated.
1. Submit Samples on rigid aluminum backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square.
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.
3. Label each coat of each Sample.
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.
C. Product List: For each product indicated. Cross - reference products to coating system and locations of
application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures and
humidity are as recommended by coating manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HIGH -GLOSS FINISH SYSTEM P72 and P73
A. High -Gloss Finish System: Complete system of compatible preparation and finishing components that
is recommended by finish manufacturer for application indicated.
B. Products: PPG Industries, Inc.; Refinish System as indicated in Finish Schedule.
HIGH -GLOSS COATINGS 09961 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.2 SHOP APPLICATION
A. Shop Application of Finish System: Prepare and finish metal according to finish system manufacturer's
written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished metal according to finish system manufacturer's written instructions. Apply temporary
strippable film if recommended by finish system manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09961
09961 -2 HIGH -GLOSS COATINGS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. All- welded metal lockers.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Accessibility Requirements:
1. Provide not less than 1 shelf located no higher than 48 inches (1219 mm) above the floor for forward reach
lockers.
2. Provide 1 shelf located at bottom of locker no lower than 15 inches above the floor for forward reach.
3. Provide hardware that does not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and that operates
with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) on at lease one disabled compliant locker per location.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of
metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish, within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
2. Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.
3. Warranty Period for All- Welded Metal Lockers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ALL - WELDED METAL LOCKERS
A. Products:
1. All- Welded Metal Lockers:
a. Steiner Company, contact Sally Campbell (800) 796 -5573 x 105
B. Locker Arrangement: Six tier Box.
C. Body: Fabricate from unperforated ,20 gauge cold - rolled steel sheet with backs, tops, bottoms, and shelves
supported by metal legs.
D. Unperforated Sides: Fabricated from 24 gauge cold rolled sheet metal
E. Perforated Doors: One - piece, fabricated from 16 gauge, cold - rolled steel sheet with manufacturer's standard
square perforations.
F. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous or knuckle type.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 -1
01 /16 /09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
G. Door Handle and Latch for Box Lockers: Stainless -steel strike plate with integral pull; with steel padlock loop
that projects through metal locker door.
H. Built -in Combination Locks: Key - controlled, three- number dialing combination locks; capable of at least five
combination changes made automatically with a control key.
1. Bolt Operation: Automatically locking spring bolt.
I. Finish: Powder coat.
1. Color: Platinum (Plat)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more than 36 inches
o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal
distortion, using concealed fasteners.
B. All- Welded Metal Lockers: Connect groups of all- welded metal lockers together with standard fasteners, with no
exposed fasteners on face frames.
C. Equipment: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately together to form tight, hairline joints,
with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
D. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices operate properly.
END OF SECTION 10505
10505 -2 METAL LOCKERS
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 10520 - FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes portable fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets.
B. Fire Extinguishers are provided by Owner. If additional extinguishers are requested during field inspection,
provide additional extinguishers as directed.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire
Extinguishers."
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire- protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are
accommodated.
B. Apply vinyl lettering on field- painted fire- protection cabinets after painting is complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cold - Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008 /A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
2.2 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by (in order of preference):
1. Sentry (preferred manufacturer)
2. Potter - Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
3. Fire -End & Croker Corporation.
4. J. L. Industries, Inc.
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
B. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each location indicated.
1. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher indicated and with
plated or baked - enamel finish.
a. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
C. Multipurpose Dry- Chemical Type: UL -rated 4- A:60 -B:C, l0 -Ib nominal capacity, in enameled -steel container.
SY1014 Sentry 10
2.3 FIRE - PROTECTION CABINET
A. Manufacturers:
1. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
C. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
D. Cabinet Material: Enameled -steel sheet.
E. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.
1. Trimless with Plaster Stop: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of
cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same
material as box, attached to box to act as plaster stop.
F. Door Material: Steel sheet.
G. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges.
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door - operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and
door material and style indicated.
1. Provide manufacturer's standard.
2. Provide concealed hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.
I. Accessories:
1. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and
location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire- protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Pressure - sensitive vinyl letters.
3) Lettering Color: Black.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
J. Finishes:
1. Manufacturer's standard baked - enamel paint for the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet except for those surfaces indicated to receive another finish.
b. Interior of cabinet and door.
2. Factory primed with manufacturer's standard, lead- and chromate -free universal primer, for field painting.
a. Exterior of cabinet door and plaster -stop trim.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit
cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth.
1. Construct fire -rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428 -inch- (1.1 -mm -) thick, cold - rolled
steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8 -inch- (16 -mm -) thick, fire- barrier material. Provide factory - drilled
mounting holes.
10520 -2 FIRE- PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated
with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow -metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm)
thick.
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed.
B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or
undercharged units.
C. Prepare recesses for recessed fire- protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
D. Install fire- protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Fire - Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire- protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
F. Install fire extinguishers in cabinets and in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at
heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb.
G. Adjust fire- protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.
H. Replace fire- protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair.
END OF SECTION 10520
FIRE - PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10520 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally blank
•
•
•
•
•
10520-4 FIRE-PROThel'IONPECIALTIES
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 10670 — MOBILE AND FIXED STORAGE SHELVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes:
1. Mobile storage and fixed shelving units for high- density stock room storage.
2. Mobile storage shelving units for sales area.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs only persons trained and approved by manufacturer to
apply manufacturer's products.
B. Work Included:
1. Mobile and fixed storage shelving, inclusive of track, carriage, wheels, platform, safety features, shelving,
accessories and attachment hardware. Include all mechanisms and accessories required for a complete
installation in working order. Include installation.
C. Related Work
1. Division 3 Section "Cement -Based Underlayment."
2. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel."
3. Division 6 Sections "Rough Carpentry."
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's product data.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for mobile storage system showing elevations at'/:" scale, half -size detail
sections of each composite member, anchors, joint system and other components not included in manufacturer's
standard data. Show how shelving interfaces with related trades.
C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Provide a 5 year warranty against defects in quality or workmanship from date of Substantial Completion.
1.5 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING
A. Protect mobile storage shelving from damage, soiling and deterioration during transit, storage and handling.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify carriage run dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying
the Work.
1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish
dimensions and proceed with fabricating storage units without field measurements. Coordinate
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
MOBILE AND FIXED STORAGE SHELVING 10670 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.1 FIXED STORAGE SHELVING FOR STOCK ROOM
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product by the following manufacturer:
1. RHC Spacemaster Corporation
B. Angle Upright Post End: Angle Upright Post End shall be constructed of 14 -gauge steel, formed into an angle
formation of 1 -15/32 x 1- 15/32. The post shall be punched on 1 1/2" centers with keyhole slots to accept rivets in
beams.
C. "T" Upright Post Intermediate: "T" upright post intermediate shall be constructed of 16 -gauge steel formed into a
T formation with a 5/16" cavity between two halves of post to allow two beams to be installed back to back. The
post dimensions shall be 3- 11/32" x 1- 15/16" The post shall be punched on 1 1/2" centers with keyhole slots to
accept rivets in beams.
D. Low Profile Double Rivet Shelf Support: Low profile double rivet shelf support shall be formed of 14 -gauge steel.
Support shall have flat tabs at either end and formed into a channel with a depth of 1 1/8 "; lower return of 25/32"
and upper return of ".
E. Full Particle Board Decking: Full particle board decking shall be 5/8" medium density (45 -48 #) industrial grade
particleboard. The decking shall be installed without the use of nuts or bolts.
F. "Easy Out" Particle Board Decking: particle board decking shall be 5/8" medium density (45 -48 #) industrial
grade particle board. The decking shall be installed without the use of nuts or bolts.
G. Finish: All steel parts shall be thoroughly cleaned in a three stage wash, and shall be finished with a high -grade
powder coat finish with complete, even coverage. Provide manufacturer's standard color "Putty ".
H. Hang Bar: Chrome hang bar shall be constructed of 16 -gague steel. Chrome tube notched to lock into angle
supports. Ends of the tubes and angle supports shall have matching holes for pins to lock hang bar in place, and for
removal.
I. Optional Floor Anchor: Each post of fixed shelving will be anchored to floor by a 14 -gauge angle connection with
fasteners.
2.2 MOBILE STORAGE SHELVING FOR STOCK ROOM
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named mobile storage system by the following
manufacturer:
1. RHC Spacemaster Corporation
B. Shelving units: As described in "Fixed Storage Shelving for Stock Room" Article of this Section.
C. Track: Low profile track 7/16" high and tapered to a width of 2" to comply with ADA requirements. Track
consists of an aluminum base with a 3/4" wide flat steel bar insert. Surface to be smooth without grooves in or
adjacent to track to collect debris. Track to mount directly to floor.
D. Carriage bases:
1. Fabricated from welded steel with a capacity of 4000 lbs. per base
2. Wheels — wheel assembly consists of a hardened steel wheel machined to match the track profile with two
sealed bearings riding on a matched axle supported by a wheel holder.
3. Frame — frame is fabricated from 11-gauge, high strength structural steel tubing (2"x1") welded into a
frame assembly with matching holes for attaching shelving, wheels and bumpers.
10670 -2 MOBILE AND FIXED STORAGE SHELVING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
4. Hardware — shelving shall be mechanically fastened to base with 3/8" diameter fasteners creating an
integral unit. Each base to have one pair of 3/4" profile bumpers preventing metal -to -metal contact between
bases.
E. Anti -tip rail: For seismic areas as indicated on Drawings, provide anti -tip rail consisting of a 1 1/8" diameter
chrome plated tube supported by a tubular steel collar with plastic inserts for ease of movement. Two collars per
end unit upright meet seismic conditions in zones 3 and 4.
F. Moveable End Upright Bracing: Every end upright unit on a moveable base will have an "X" brace. One "X"
brace per end side on 7', 8' and 9' high units, and two per side on 10' high units.
G. Optional six inch moveable handle: as indicated on drawings, provide one 6" handle per base unit consisting of a
3/4" diameter rod bolted to the upright with blind fasteners.
H. Latch Brake: provide two -part latch brake to prevent aisles from moving apart in normal operation with both parts
bolting to the end upright aisles. The left side latches via a hook to a pin on the right side. The hook has a handle
pin for easy up and down latching motion.
I. Option Ladder Hanger: as indicated on drawings, provide ladder hanger bracket mounted to shelving for
suspending folding access ladder.
2.3 MOBILE STORAGE SYSTEM FOR SALES AREA
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named mobile storage system by the following
manufacturer:
1. Stetler Partners; SpaceWorks Systems 1II.
B. Shelving units: Closed back -to -back steel, with custom color finish.
C. End panels: "Picture Frame" style with chalkboard finish on steel substrate.
1. Mechanically operated handles, stainless steel.
D. Track: Concave Anti -Tip Track to mount directly to floor, Black Oxide finish.
E. Carriage bases: Manufacturer's standard carriages, size and capacity to accommodate indicated shelving units.
2.4 OPERATION/PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Conform to applicable code requirements, including lateral movement, where applicable.
B. Design system to resist lateral force when fully loaded, in any direction. Include manufacturer's lateral
reinforcement (ant -tip) clips regardless of code requirements.
C. Shelf Loading: design shelving for minimum 50 lbs. per square foot with temporary deflection not to exceed
span/180 and with no permanent deflection.
2.5 FLOORING /SUBSTRATE
A. Concrete Leveling Topping: Ensure that flooring substrate is smooth, level and stable in accordance with shelving
manufacturers' written requirements. Coordinate with the work of related trades in Division 3 Section "Cement -
Based Underlayment.
MOBILE AND FIXED STORAGE SHELVING 10670 -3
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
2.6 INSPECTION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where mobile storage shelving is to be installed and notify the Architect of
conditions detrimental to the completion of the work.
B. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
2.7 PREPARATION
A. Adjacent surfaces shall be clean with obstructions and projecting objects removed prior to installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with the work of other trades to assure proper provisions for interface with installation.
B. Install mobile storage shelving in strict accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.
C. Flooring shall be smooth, flush and level. All tracks shall be leveled and all gaps between track and floor filled
with fast setting cements as recommended by manufacturer to form a solid base. All tracks shall be anchored to
subfloor.
D. Locate and position rails properly, leveled and grouted, allowing a minimum of 1/4" for grout under high point.
Work grout under rail, fill any voids completely and trim sides flush with rails.
E. Upon completion of the installation, put mobile storage shelving through at least 10 complete cycles of operation.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect surfaces of shelving with
haft paper or other suitable covering.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect mobile storage shelving to ensure proper operating condition. Repair or replace damaged units as directed
by the Owner's Project Manager.
END OF SECTION 10670
10670 -4 MOBILE AND FIXED STORAGE SHELVING
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 10801 — TOILET AND OFFICE ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Washroom accessories.
2. Childcare accessories.
3. Office accessories.
4. Custodial accessories.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Schedule:
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WASHROOM AND CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product by the following manufacturers:
1. American Specialties, Inc.
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
3. Brocar Products, Inc. (513.922.2888)
4. Specialized Builder's Hardware (SBH) (714.603.4751)
B. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser: Bobrick B -6977
C. Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick; B -262
D. Surface Mounted Waste Receptacle: Bobrick B -279, liners supplied by Owner
E. Stainless Steel Grab Bar
1. Bobrick B -6806:
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.
3. Flange covers to be 11 GA and snap over mounting flanges concealing screws
4. Material: type -304 stainless steel, 18 GA.
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish. Outside Diameter: 1 '/s inches
5. Configuration and Length: min 36" long at rear and 42" at sides (For Canada only: provide 24" at rear of toilet
and 36" at sides)
6. Loading: install grab bars to provide load support as required by applicable codes.
F. Sanitary- Napkin Disposal Unit: Bobrick B -270 Contura 7' /" wide
G. Seat -Cover Dispenser: Bobrick B221 15" wide x 11" high x 2" deep surface mounted stainless steel satin finish
H. Mirror Unit : Bobrick B290 24" x 36" without shelf
I. Mirror Glass: Silvered mirrored glass as specified in Division 8 Section "Mirrors."
TOILET AND OFFICE ACCESSORIES 10801 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
J. Liquid -Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B -5050
K. Diaper- Changing Station: Brocar Products 100 EV
L Description: Vertical unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child - protection strap.
2. Color: Cream/beige
3. Load capacity: Shall be engineered to support 250-lb static load when opened.
4. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed.
5. Operation: By pneumatic shock - absorbing mechanism.
6. Material and Finish: High- density polyethylene in manufacturer's standard color.
7. Liner Dispenser: Built in, liners supplied by owner.
L. Double Coat Hook: ASI 0745 -2
2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc.
2. TCI Products.
3. Truebro, Inc.
B. Underlavatory Guard:
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with
and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings.
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded - plastic, white.
2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product by the following manufacturers:
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Mop and Broom Holder Bobrick B -223 x 24
1. Description: surface mounted holder
2. Length: 24 inches
3. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring- loaded, rubber hat, cam type.
4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, type -304 finish (satin).
5. Mounting height: 5' -6" A.F.F.
2.4 OFFICE ACCESSORIES
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product by the following manufacturers:
1. Trimco (323.262.4191)
2. Fellowes
B. Keyboard Tray: Fellowes, model #93801 to be installed at manager's office counter as indicated on Drawings.
C. Bolts to attach safe to floor
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of
six keys to Owner's representative.
B. Mirrors:
1. Fabricate mirrored glass to fit mirror frames, complying with frame manufacturer's instructions.
10801 -2 TOILET AND OFFICE ACCESSORIES
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUAREmGARD, OR - STORE #2805
2. Cut and seal mirrored glass according to Division 8 Section "Mirrors."
3. Install glass in frames according to frame manufacturer's instructions and drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated
and recommended by unit manufacturer. If manufacturer does not specify attachment, fasten accessories with screws
or bolts extending 1" minimum into solid backing. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and
at heights indicated.
END OF SECTION 10801
TOILET AND OFFICE ACCESSORIES 10801 -3
. .
' • -;"1' ' -
. .
Or/16/09 _GAP; INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
Page left intentionally. blank
•
•
: —
•
•
;•-•
• •;-
•
.•
,
10801-4 TOILET ANIYOFFIE ACCESSORIES
•
GAP, INC. 01/16/09 •
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 11900 - RETAIL, DISPLAY SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Ceiling display tracks and accessories.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CEILING DISPLAY TRACKS
A. Products: As supplied by Owner.
-
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install Ceiling display tracks and accessories as indicated in Drawings and according to Manufacturer's
instructions. •
END OF SECTION 11900
RETAIL DISPLAY SPECIALTIES. 11900-1
GAP, INC.
:.WASHINGTON - STORE #2805 20080538
- - _ • - _
•,..
. . ,
•
• •
•
•
•
•
11900-2 RETAIL DISPLAY SPECIALTIES
- .-„
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
SECTION 12356 - MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Furnish and install high - pressure laminate casework and accessories as shown and listed on drawings and
specified herein. Include all countertops, splashes, supports, shelving, and filler panels necessary for a complete
casework installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For cabinets, countertop material, and cabinet hardware.
B. Shop Drawings: For cabinets and countertops. Include plans, elevations, details, and attachments to other work.
Show materials, finishes, filler panels, hardware, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining countertops, and
cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: Comply with AWI 400 Premium Grade standards, except as noted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINET MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.
2. Hardwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 7 percent moisture content.
3. Softwood Lumber: Kiln dried to 10 percent moisture content.
4. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -3, made without urea formaldehyde.
a. Dow Bioproducts; Woodstalk.
B. Exposed Materials:
1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high - pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS.
a. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range.
2. PVC Edge Molding: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3 mm thick at doors and drawer
fronts, and 1 mm thick elsewhere.
a. Color: Match laminate.
C. Semiexposed Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
1. Plastic Laminate: Particleboard faced with high - pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3,
Grade VGS.
a. Colors, Textures, and Pattems: Match exposed laminate.
2. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium - density fiberboard finished with thermally fused,
melamine- impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT -1.
a. Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG -1.
b. Colors: As selected by Architect from cabinet manufacturer's full range.
D. Concealed Materials:
MANUFACTURED CASEWORK 12356 -1
01/16/09 GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805 20080538
1. Solid wood or plywood, of any hardwood or softwood species, with no defects affecting strength or utility;
particleboard; medium - density fiberboard; or hardboard.
2. Provide neutral colored 0.20 inch thick balancing sheets conforming to ANSI/NEMA 3 LD -2000, BKR on
concealed sides of panels.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units complying with BHMA A156.9, of type, size, style, material, and finish as
indicated by manufacturer's designations.
B. Pulls: Stainless steel bar pull.
1. Basis of Design Product: Amerock 19011 -SS.
C. Hinges: Semiconcealed (wraparound) butt hinges for overlay doors.
1. Product: Haefele 344.52.101 270 degree swing 3- knuckle style.
D. Drawer Guides: Epoxy- coated - metal, self- closing drawer guides; designed to prevent rebound when drawers are
closed; with nylon- tired, ball - bearing rollers; and complying with BHMA A156.9, Type B05011 or B05091.
1. Standard drawer: 3/4 extension, 100 lb load rating.
2. File drawer: Full extension, 100 lb load rating.
E. Wall Shelving Hardware
1. Shelving standards shall be KV87 ANO.
2. Hang rod standards shall be KV83/85 ANO.
3. Shelving brackets shall be KV187 with KV211 ANO rests.
4. Hang rod brackets shall be KV183/1850 ANO with KV191 ANO Hang Rod Saddle and 1 -1/16" OD tubing.
F. Shelf Clips
1. Injection molded clear plastic, with a double pin engagement 32mm on center with 3/4" and 1" anti -tip locking
tabs.
G. Wiremold
1. Provide all parts necessary for a complete installation, including ALA3800B -I0 Single compartment satin
anodized aluminum base, ALAC -5 covers, ALA -DR standard duplex receptacle covers, end and entrance
fittings.
2.3 COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Plastic Laminate: High - pressure decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3.
1. Grade: HGS.
2. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from countertop manufacturer's full range.
3. Edges: 3 mm PVC tape to match laminate.
B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M -3.
1. Thickness: 1 inch.
2. Backer: BKR.
2.4 CABINETS
A. Basis of Design Products: Provide the named product or a comparable product by another manufacturer.
Comparable products are subject to Owner's and Architect's review and must be accompanied by a written
comparison of the specified product to the proposed product.
1. Case Systems, Inc; Premium grade cabinets as specified herein.
B. Face Style: Flush overlay.
12356 -2 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
GAP, INC. 01/16/09
20080538 WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD, OR - STORE #2805
C. Cabinet Style: Frameless.
D. Door and Drawer Fronts: 1/2 -inch- (I2.7 -mm -) thick plastic - laminate -faced particleboard, with PVC edge banding.
E. Exposed Cabinet End Finish: Plastic laminate.
F. Exceptions to Premium Grade:
1. Cabinet bottoms, adjustable shelves 36 inches wide and wider, and adjustable shelves in open cabinets shall be
1 inch thick.
2. Cabinet backs shall be min. 1/2" thick, fully captured at sides and bottom.
3. Drawer components, including bottoms, shall be min. 1/2" thick. Drawer sides, front and back shall be dowelled
together and mounted on drawer bottom by means of screws passing through the bottom mount drawer slide,
through the drawer bottom, and extending a min. of 3/4" into the drawer sides, creating a rigid, non - racking
drawer assembly.
2.5 PLASTIC - LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A. Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front, cove (intersection of top with backsplash), backsplash,
and endsplash style:
1. Front: Self -edge.
2. Backsplash: Square edge.
3. Endsplash: Square edge where indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces; use concealed shims. Where cabinets abut
other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Provide filler strips, scribe strips, and moldings in finish to
match cabinet face.
B. Install cabinets without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings and are aligned. Complete installation of
hardware and accessories as indicated.
C. Install casework level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m).
D. Fasten cabinets to adjacent units and to backing.
1. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., with
toggle bolts through metal backing behind gypsum board.
E. Fasten plastic - laminate countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop.
Form seams using splines to align adjacent surfaces, and secure with glue and concealed clamping devices designed
for this purpose.
F. Adjust cabinets and hardware so doors and drawers are centered in openings and operate smoothly without warp or
bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 12356
MANUFACTURED CASEWORK 12356 -3
• = 01%16 %09. GAP, INC.
WASHINGTON SQUARE/TIGARD; OR - STORE #2805 20080538
'
Page left intentionally blank
•
z •
•
•
12356 -4 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK